US20220313451A1 - Intervertbral devices and related methods - Google Patents
Intervertbral devices and related methods Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20220313451A1 US20220313451A1 US17/833,792 US202217833792A US2022313451A1 US 20220313451 A1 US20220313451 A1 US 20220313451A1 US 202217833792 A US202217833792 A US 202217833792A US 2022313451 A1 US2022313451 A1 US 2022313451A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- intervertebral device
- body portion
- intervertebral
- respect
- base element
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title abstract description 20
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 claims description 62
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 claims description 23
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 claims description 23
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 claims description 14
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 claims description 14
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 14
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 abstract description 60
- 229940124597 therapeutic agent Drugs 0.000 abstract description 60
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 abstract description 26
- 230000008468 bone growth Effects 0.000 abstract description 11
- 230000004927 fusion Effects 0.000 abstract description 11
- 210000000988 bone and bone Anatomy 0.000 abstract description 10
- 238000002324 minimally invasive surgery Methods 0.000 abstract description 7
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 abstract description 4
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 abstract description 3
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 35
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 35
- 239000011800 void material Substances 0.000 description 34
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 32
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 24
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 14
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 239000000560 biocompatible material Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000035876 healing Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000000994 depressogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 208000003618 Intervertebral Disc Displacement Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 206010061246 Intervertebral disc degeneration Diseases 0.000 description 4
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000003754 machining Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910001092 metal group alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 238000000465 moulding Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 208000024891 symptom Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 238000002560 therapeutic procedure Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000002097 psoas muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 230000001954 sterilising effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004659 sterilization and disinfection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000034347 Faecal incontinence Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241001669573 Galeorhinus galeus Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010061218 Inflammation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010060860 Neurological symptom Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 235000008331 Pinus X rigitaeda Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000011613 Pinus brutia Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241000018646 Pinus brutia Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010046543 Urinary incontinence Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000003187 abdominal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000032683 aging Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003484 anatomy Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000002651 drug therapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004054 inflammatory process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001045 lordotic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001537 neural effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000035824 paresthesia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000000554 physical therapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002035 prolonged effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000284 resting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000278 spinal cord Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000000273 spinal nerve root Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 208000005198 spinal stenosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000006641 stabilisation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011105 stabilization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035882 stress Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000002700 urine Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000003313 weakening effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/46—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor
- A61F2/4603—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof
- A61F2/4611—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof of spinal prostheses
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/30767—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth
- A61F2/30771—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth applied in original prostheses, e.g. holes or grooves
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/44—Joints for the spine, e.g. vertebrae, spinal discs
- A61F2/4455—Joints for the spine, e.g. vertebrae, spinal discs for the fusion of spinal bodies, e.g. intervertebral fusion of adjacent spinal bodies, e.g. fusion cages
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/44—Joints for the spine, e.g. vertebrae, spinal discs
- A61F2/4455—Joints for the spine, e.g. vertebrae, spinal discs for the fusion of spinal bodies, e.g. intervertebral fusion of adjacent spinal bodies, e.g. fusion cages
- A61F2/447—Joints for the spine, e.g. vertebrae, spinal discs for the fusion of spinal bodies, e.g. intervertebral fusion of adjacent spinal bodies, e.g. fusion cages substantially parallelepipedal, e.g. having a rectangular or trapezoidal cross-section
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/46—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor
- A61F2/4603—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30108—Shapes
- A61F2002/3011—Cross-sections or two-dimensional shapes
- A61F2002/30138—Convex polygonal shapes
- A61F2002/30156—Convex polygonal shapes triangular
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30108—Shapes
- A61F2002/30199—Three-dimensional shapes
- A61F2002/30261—Three-dimensional shapes parallelepipedal
- A61F2002/30266—Three-dimensional shapes parallelepipedal wedge-shaped parallelepipeds
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30329—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements
- A61F2002/30383—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements made by laterally inserting a protrusion, e.g. a rib into a complementarily-shaped groove
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30329—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements
- A61F2002/30471—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements connected by a hinged linkage mechanism, e.g. of the single-bar or multi-bar linkage type
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30329—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements
- A61F2002/30476—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements locked by an additional locking mechanism
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30329—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements
- A61F2002/30476—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements locked by an additional locking mechanism
- A61F2002/30492—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements locked by an additional locking mechanism using a locking pin
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30329—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements
- A61F2002/30518—Connections or couplings between prosthetic parts, e.g. between modular parts; Connecting elements with possibility of relative movement between the prosthetic parts
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30535—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30537—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for adjustable
- A61F2002/30538—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for adjustable for adjusting angular orientation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30535—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30537—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for adjustable
- A61F2002/30556—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for adjustable for adjusting thickness
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30535—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30579—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for with mechanically expandable devices, e.g. fixation devices
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30316—The prosthesis having different structural features at different locations within the same prosthesis; Connections between prosthetic parts; Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30535—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for
- A61F2002/30593—Special structural features of bone or joint prostheses not otherwise provided for hollow
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2002/30001—Additional features of subject-matter classified in A61F2/28, A61F2/30 and subgroups thereof
- A61F2002/30667—Features concerning an interaction with the environment or a particular use of the prosthesis
- A61F2002/30677—Means for introducing or releasing pharmaceutical products, e.g. antibiotics, into the body
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/30767—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth
- A61F2/30771—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth applied in original prostheses, e.g. holes or grooves
- A61F2002/30772—Apertures or holes, e.g. of circular cross section
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/30767—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth
- A61F2/30771—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth applied in original prostheses, e.g. holes or grooves
- A61F2002/30772—Apertures or holes, e.g. of circular cross section
- A61F2002/30784—Plurality of holes
- A61F2002/30785—Plurality of holes parallel
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/30767—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth
- A61F2/30771—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth applied in original prostheses, e.g. holes or grooves
- A61F2002/30878—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth applied in original prostheses, e.g. holes or grooves with non-sharp protrusions, for instance contacting the bone for anchoring, e.g. keels, pegs, pins, posts, shanks, stems, struts
- A61F2002/30891—Plurality of protrusions
- A61F2002/30892—Plurality of protrusions parallel
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/30767—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth
- A61F2/30771—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth applied in original prostheses, e.g. holes or grooves
- A61F2002/30904—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth applied in original prostheses, e.g. holes or grooves serrated profile, i.e. saw-toothed
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/30767—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth
- A61F2002/30906—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth shot- sand- or grit-blasted
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/30767—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth
- A61F2002/3093—Special external or bone-contacting surface, e.g. coating for improving bone ingrowth for promoting ingrowth of bone tissue
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/46—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor
- A61F2/4603—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof
- A61F2002/4625—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof with relative movement between parts of the instrument during use
- A61F2002/4627—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof with relative movement between parts of the instrument during use with linear motion along or rotating motion about the instrument axis or the implantation direction, e.g. telescopic, along a guiding rod, screwing inside the instrument
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61F—FILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
- A61F2/00—Filters implantable into blood vessels; Prostheses, i.e. artificial substitutes or replacements for parts of the body; Appliances for connecting them with the body; Devices providing patency to, or preventing collapsing of, tubular structures of the body, e.g. stents
- A61F2/02—Prostheses implantable into the body
- A61F2/30—Joints
- A61F2/46—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor
- A61F2/4603—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof
- A61F2002/4625—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof with relative movement between parts of the instrument during use
- A61F2002/4628—Special tools or methods for implanting or extracting artificial joints, accessories, bone grafts or substitutes, or particular adaptations therefor for insertion or extraction of endoprosthetic joints or of accessories thereof with relative movement between parts of the instrument during use with linear motion along or rotating motion about an axis transverse to the instrument axis or to the implantation direction, e.g. clamping
Definitions
- This disclosure relates generally to medical devices, and more particularly, to medical devices utilized for procedures performed on or near the spine.
- Degenerative disc diseases are common disorders that can impact all or a portion of a vertebral disc, a cushion-like structure located between the vertebral bodies of the spine.
- Degenerative disc diseases may lead, for example, to a disc herniation where the vertebral disc bulges out or extrudes beyond the usual margins of the disc and the spine.
- Disc herniation in particular, is believed to be the result of excessive loading on the disc in combination with weakening of the annulus due to such factors as aging and genetics.
- Such degenerative disc diseases are also associated with spinal stenosis, a narrowing of the bony and ligamentous structures of the spine.
- disc herniation can occur anywhere along the perimeter of the disc, it occurs more frequently in the posterior and posterior-lateral regions of the disc, where the spinal cord and spinal nerve roots reside. Compression of these neural structures can lead to pain, parasthesias, weakness, urine and fecal incontinence and other neurological symptoms that can substantially impact basic daily activities and quality of life.
- Temporary relief of the pain associated with disc herniation, or other degenerative disc diseases, is often sought through conservative therapy, which includes positional therapy (e.g. sitting or bending forward to reduce pressure on the spine), physical therapy, and drug therapy to reduce pain and inflammation.
- positional therapy e.g. sitting or bending forward to reduce pressure on the spine
- physical therapy e.g., physical therapy
- drug therapy to reduce pain and inflammation.
- surgery may be considered to treat the structural source of the symptoms.
- more drastic measures may include disc replacement surgery or vertebral fusion.
- implantable devices that have been developed for disc replacement and vertebral fusion. Such implantable devices, also referred to as cage systems, may be deployed to replace the vertebral disc and fuse the adjacent vertebrae, relieving pain and providing increased mobility to the patient.
- known implantable devices and methodologies have drawbacks. For example, many of the implantable devices currently available do not allow for an ample amount of materials, such as certain therapeutic agents that encourage bone growth, to be positioned within and around the devices and adjacent vertebral bones. Such bone growth materials allow for a higher level of fusion of the adjacent vertebrae, providing increased stabilization and minimize the likelihood of further issues in the future.
- implantable intervertebral devices require complex manipulation of delivery systems for implanting the device itself, and other systems for deployment of such therapeutic agents.
- implantable intervertebral devices provide a single lifting activity or function. For example, they may be fixed in a certain geometric configuration, having a fixed height, or a fixed angular relationship between a top surface and a bottom surface of an intervertebral device, which limits the procedure available for positioning the device within a patient. Also, many implantable devices are large structures that are not easily utilized in a minimally invasive procedure. Rather, they may require surgical procedures allowing greater access, which subjects the patient to higher risks of disease and prolonged infection.
- implantable devices intended for replacement of a vertebral disc, which allow for ample placement of bone growth material that may lead to better fusion between adjacent vertebral bones.
- implantable intervertebral devices that include delivery systems that provide increased functionality, such delivery systems utilized for deployment of the intervertebral device within a patient as well as therapeutic agents to encourage bone growth and healing.
- an intervertebral device that is configured to include a top planar surface that is further adapted to include portions that move at one of a plurality of rates as the intervertebral device is expanded, such that the top planar surface forms a desired complex angle with respect to the bottom planar surface as the intervertebral device is expanded.
- the intervertebral device may be adapted to correspond to any suitable approach to the spine, including but not limited to, anterior lumbar interbody fusion (ALIF) access where the vertebral disc is accessed from an anterior abdominal incision; posterior lumbar interbody fusion (PLIF) access where the vertebral disc is accessed from a posterior incision; transforaminal lumbar interbody fusion (TLIF) access where the disc is accessed from a posterior incision on one side of the spine; transpsoas interbody fusion (DLIF or XLIF) access where the disc is accessed from an incision through the psoas muscle on one side of the spine; oblique (posterior) lumbar interbody fusion (OLLIF) access where the disc is accessed from an incision through the psoas muscle obliquely; or any other desired access.
- ALIF anterior lumbar interbody fusion
- PLIF posterior lumbar interbody fusion
- TLIF transforaminal
- an expandable intervertebral device may comprise a base element, a first body portion slidably attached to the base and configured to move in at least a first direction with respect to the base, the first body portion including a first plurality of curvilinear surfaces, a second body portion slidably attached to the base and configured to move in at least a second direction with respect to the base, the second body portion including a second plurality of curvilinear surfaces, each of the first plurality of curvilinear surfaces configured to couple with a respective one of the second plurality of curvilinear surfaces, such that the second body portion at least rotates with respect to the base as the first body portion moves in the first direction.
- the first body portion may include a first engaging element and the second body portion may include a second engaging element, the second engaging element configured to couple to the first engaging element.
- the first and second engaging elements are configured such that the coupling of the first and second engaging elements prevents movement of the second body portion in a third direction with respect to the base when a compression force is applied between the top surface of the second body portion and the bottom surface of the base.
- the third direction may be substantially opposite to the second direction.
- the device may include a longitudinal access and the second body portion may include an axis of rotation, the axis of rotation of the second body portion being parallel to the longitudinal axis of the device. While in other embodiments the device may include a longitudinal access and the second body portion may include an axis of rotation, the axis of rotation of the second body portion being perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the device. In still other embodiments the device may include a longitudinal access and the second body portion may include an axis of rotation, the axis of rotation of the second body portion neither being perpendicular nor parallel to the longitudinal axis of the device.
- each of a first pair of the first curvilinear surfaces of the first body portion are similar, while in other embodiments each of a second pair of the first curvilinear surfaces of the first body portion are similar, the second pair being different from the first pair, and in yet other embodiments each of the first plurality of curvilinear surfaces are different.
- the device includes a delivery system, which may have an attachment assembly including a lumen therethrough, the attachment assembly may be configured to removably attach to the base element and position the device.
- the delivery system may further include an expansion tool having an elongate shaft, a distal end of the elongate shaft may be configured to pass through the lumen of the attachment assembly and removably attach to the first body portion, the expansion tool being configured to translate the elongate shaft and the first body portion attached thereto.
- the delivery system may further include an insertion assembly having an elongate member, the elongate member of the insertion assembly may be slidably coupled to the lumen of the attachment tool, a distal end of the elongate member configured to translate through the lumen of the attachment tool.
- the base, first body portion, and second body portion may be configured to define a void central to the base, first body portion and second body portion, the distal end of the elongate member configured to translate within the void.
- a central longitudinal axis of the base, first body portion, and second body portion passes through the void.
- the second body portion includes a top surface having a first corner portion, a second corner portion, a third corner portion and a fourth corner portion, each of the first corner portion, second corner portion, third corner portion, and fourth corner portion moving at a corresponding one of a plurality of rates as the second body portion moves in the second direction, the plurality of rates being selected such that the top surface forms an angle with respect to the bottom surface as the second body portion moves in the second direction.
- the rate of one of the first corner portion and the second corner portion is the same as the rate of one of the third corner portion and the fourth corner portion, while in other embodiments each of the plurality of rates are different, such that the top surface of the second body portion forms a complex angle with respect to the bottom surface of the base.
- a method in another aspect, includes providing an intervertebral device having a height and a delivery system, the delivery system including an attachment assembly having a lumen, an expansion tool having a shaft, and an insertion tool having an elongate member, attaching the intervertebral device to a distal end of the attachment assembly and positioning the intervertebral device between adjacent vertebrae, inserting the expansion tool within the lumen of the attachment assembly, a distal end of the expansion tool removably attaching to the intervertebral device, and translating the expanding tool resulting in a change in the height of the intervertebral device.
- the method may further include detaching the expansion tool from the intervertebral device and removing the expansion tool from the lumen of the delivery system, positioning a therapeutic agent within the lumen of the attachment assembly, translating the elongate member of the insertion tool within the lumen of the attachment assembly, translation of the elongate member resulting in translation of the therapeutic agent, such that a portion of the therapeutic agent is positioned within the intervertebral device.
- the insertion tool further may include a guide assembly having a tubular member
- the step of positioning the therapeutic agent may include positioning the therapeutic agent within the lumen of the tubular member of the guide assembly
- the step of translating the elongate member of the insertion tool may include the step of translating the tubular member of the guide assembly within the lumen of the attachment assembly.
- FIG. 1 is a top view of an exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIG. 2 is a perspective partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 3 is another perspective partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 4 is a side partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 5 is another side partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an exemplary delivery device.
- FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a portion of the exemplary delivery device of FIG. 6 .
- FIG. 8 is a top view of an element of the portion of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 9 is a partial section view of the element depicted in FIG. 8 .
- FIG. 10 is another top view of the element of the portion of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 11 is another partial section view of the element depicted in FIG. 8 .
- FIGS. 12A-C are perspective views of certain elements of the portion of the exemplary delivery device of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 13 is a partial section view of a portion of the exemplary delivery device of FIG. 6 .
- FIG. 14 is a perspective view of an expansion tool of the exemplary delivery device of FIG. 6 .
- FIGS. 15A-15B are partial section views of portions of the delivery device of FIG. 6 .
- FIGS. 16A-46B are perspective views of a portion of the element FIG. 14 , the portion engaging an element of an exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIG. 17 is a partial cut view of a portion of the element of FIG. 14 .
- FIG. 18 is a partial section view of a portion of the element of FIG. 14 .
- FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a guide assembly, as part of a delivery tool.
- FIG. 20 is a perspective view of an insertion assembly, as part of a delivery tool.
- FIG. 21 is a partial section view of a portion of the insertion assembly of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 22 is another partial section view of a portion of the insertion assembly of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 23A is a perspective view of the guide assembly of FIG. 19 , coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly.
- FIG. 23B is a perspective view of the guide assembly of FIG. 19 and the insertion assembly of FIG. 20 coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly.
- FIG. 24A is another perspective view of the guide assembly of FIG. 19 and the insertion assembly of FIG. 20 coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly.
- FIG. 24B is a partial section view of a distal portion of a delivery system.
- FIG. 25A is a partial section view of the guide assembly of FIG. 19 and the insertion assembly of FIG. 20 coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly.
- FIG. 25B is another partial section view of a distal portion of a delivery system.
- FIG. 26 is a top view of another exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIG. 27 is a partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 28 is another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 29 is a yet another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 30 is still another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 26 .
- FIGS. 31A and 31B are end views of another exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIGS. 32A and 32B are additional end views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIGS. 31A and 31B , respectively.
- FIG. 33A is a lateral view of an exemplary placement of an intervertebral device.
- FIG. 33B is a top view of an exemplary placement of an intervertebral device.
- FIG. 34 is a top view of yet another exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIG. 35 is a partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 36 is another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 37 is yet another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 38 is a side elevation cut view of the intervertebral device of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 39 is another side elevation cut view of the intervertebral device of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 40 is still another side elevation cut view of the intervertebral device of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 41A is a top view of another exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIGS. 41B and 41C are perspective views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIGS. 42 and 43 are side elevation cut views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIGS. 44 and 45 are additional side elevation cut views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIGS. 46A and 46B are end elevation views of the intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIG. 47 is a graph depicting certain geometric properties of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIG. 48 is a side elevation cut view of an element of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIG. 49 is another graph depicting certain geometric properties of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIG. 50 is yet another graph depicting certain geometric properties of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 41A .
- FIG. 51A is a top view of yet another exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIGS. 51B-51C are prospective views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 51A .
- FIGS. 52A-52B are side elevation views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 51A .
- FIGS. 53A-53B are side section views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 51A .
- FIG. 54A is a top view of another exemplary intervertebral device.
- FIGS. 54B and 54C are side elevation views of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 54A .
- FIGS. 55A and 55B are partial section views along a first longitudinal axis of the exemplary intervertebral device of FIG. 54A .
- FIGS. 56A-60 are graphical views of portions of the intervertebral device of FIG. 54A .
- Intervertebral devices and systems, and methods of their use, are disclosed having configurations suitable for placement between two adjacent vertebrae, replacing the functionality of the disc therebetween.
- Intervertebral devices and systems contemplated herein are implantable devices intended for replacement of a vertebral disc, which may have deteriorated due to disease for example.
- the intervertebral devices and systems disclosed or contemplated herein are configured to allow for ample placement of therapeutic agents therein, including bone growth enhancement material, which may lead to better fusion between adjacent vertebral bones.
- the delivery systems described herein provide increased functionality, such delivery systems utilized for deployment of an intervertebral device within a patient as well as deployment of therapeutic agents to encourage bone growth and healing, such systems being less complex.
- such intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein are configured to include a top planar surface that is further adapted to include portions that move at one of a plurality of rates as the intervertebral device is expanded, such that the top planar surface forms a desired complex angle with respect to the bottom planar surface as the intervertebral device is expanded.
- the top planar surface, or element thereof may be configured to rotate about a rotational axis to achieve the desired complex angle.
- Certain intervertebral devices may be configured such that the top planar surface rotates about a rotational axis that is perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device.
- intervertebral devices may be configured such that the top planar surface rotates about a rotational axis that is parallel to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device.
- still other intervertebral devices may be configured such that the tope planar surface rotates about a rotational axis that is neither perpendicular nor parallel to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device.
- the intervertebral devices and systems may be configured for use in minimally invasive procedures, if desired. Accordingly, the intervertebral device may be adapted to correspond to any suitable approach to the spine described or contemplated herein.
- the embodiments of the present disclosure may include certain aspects each of which may be present in one or more medical devices or systems thereof. Structures and devices shown below in cross-section or in block diagram are not necessarily to scale and are illustrative of exemplary embodiments. Furthermore, the illustrated exemplary embodiments disclosed or contemplated herein may include more or less structures than depicted and are not intended to be limited to the specific depicted structures. While various portions of the present disclosure are described relative to specific structures or processes with respect to a medical device or system using specific labels, such as “locked” or “therapeutic agents”, these labels are not meant to be limiting.
- the expandable intervertebral devices described herein may be made from any suitable biocompatible material, including but not limited to metals, metal alloys (e.g. stainless steel) and polymers (e.g. polycarbonate), and may be formed using any appropriate process, such as screw-machining or molding (e.g. injection molding).
- the intervertebral devices herein may be sized for minimally invasive procedures having operating lumens at about 12 mm or less.
- any expandable intervertebral device described or contemplated herein may have a height in the range from about 6 mm to about 16 mm, and a length in the range of from about 20 to about 40 mm, and a width in the range of from about 8 mm to about 16 mm.
- the intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein may be positioned between adjacent vertebrae through any suitable procedure, such as through a posterior lumbar interbody approach or through a transforaminal lumbar interbody approach, for example.
- Each of the intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein may have a collapsed configuration and an expanded configuration.
- the intervertebral devices may include a top planar surface and a bottom planar surface, such that when in the collapsed configuration the top planar surface and the bottom planar surface define a first angular relationship and when in the expanded configuration the top planar surface and the bottom planar surface may define a second angular relationship.
- the top planar surface and the bottom planar surface may define one of a plurality of angular relationships.
- the second angular relationship may be
- the various intervertebral device embodiments described or contemplated herein may include first, second, and third elements.
- the first element may also be referred to as a base element.
- the second element may also be referred to as a sliding element or a first body portion.
- the third element may also be referred to as a lifting element or a second body portion.
- an exemplary intervertebral device 700 includes a first or base element 710 , a second element or sliding element 740 , and a third element or lifting element 770 .
- the second or sliding element 740 may also be referred to as a first body portion 740
- the third element 770 may also be referred to as a second body portion 770 .
- FIGS. 2 and 3 in which perspective views of the exemplary intervertebral device 700 is depicted in cut view along section A-A of FIG. 1 .
- the elements 710 , 740 , 770 cooperate such that the intervertebral device 700 geometric height, H 7 , may have a minimum, collapsed configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 2 , and a maximum, expanded configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 3 .
- the first element 710 also referred to as base 710 , or base element 710 , is configured to provide a base or outer structure for the intervertebral device 700 , and includes a first or proximal end 712 , and a second or distal end 714 , and two side portions, a first side portion 716 and an opposing side portion 718 .
- a bottom portion 720 may include one or more openings 722 allowing for therapeutic agents to pass therethrough.
- the second and third elements 740 , 770 may also include similar openings for transmission of such therapeutic agents, for example.
- the proximal end 712 may include an opening 730 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or for expanding, contracting, or locking the intervertebral device 700 in a specific configuration, as discussed below in greater detail with respect to delivery system 800 .
- the intervertebral device 700 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H 7 , between a first collapsed height H 7-1 and a second expanded height H 7-2 , with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3 , respectively.
- the intervertebral device 700 may be expanded from a first position, having the height of H 7-1 in FIG. 2 , to a second position, having the height of H 7-2 in FIG. 3 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that position.
- the proximal end 712 may also include structures, such as protrusions 730 P and grooves 730 G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described below with respect to delivery system 800 of FIG. 8 .
- Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning the intervertebral device 700 , for example between two adjacent vertebrae, within a patient.
- the delivery system 800 may include tubular members through which therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within the intervertebral device 700 , and exiting through the one or more openings 722 of the element 710 , or similar openings of the remaining elements 740 , 770 . In this way, such agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue.
- the third element 770 is slidably interfaced to the first element 710 such that the third element 770 at least slides vertically with respect to the first element 710 .
- the third element 770 may include one or more openings 772 in a top portion or surface 771 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough.
- the top portion 771 may include one or more protrusions 774 that may aide in holding the top portion 771 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only a few protrusions 774 are identified, additional or less protrusions 774 may be utilized.
- protrusion structures 774 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form and may be applied to any embodiment described or contemplated herein. Additionally, sidewalls 716 , 718 of element 710 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and a bottom portion 720 of base 710 may include one or more protrusions 721 . Protrusions 721 may, for example, may be similar to protrusions 774 , which may aide in holding a bottom portion 720 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example.
- the element 710 may include a pair of positioning structures or protrusions 724 , which may be configured or adapted to move within one of a pair of corresponding channels 776 of the third element 770 , to ensure that the element 770 moves in a specific direction with respect to the element 710 .
- the channel 776 and associated protrusion 724 may be configured to form any desirable angle with respect to a longitudinal axis of element 710 .
- the channel 776 of element 770 is substantially perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of element 710 and, therefore, the element 770 moves in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of element 710 .
- a void or space 702 is defined by the first, second, and third elements 710 , 740 , 770 of the intervertebral device 700 , the void 702 increasing as the device 700 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- therapeutic agents may be positioned within the void 702 from the first end 712 to the second end 714 . Such agents may further flow out of the open space via additional openings, such as openings 772 and 722 , positioned about the elements 710 , 740 , 770 .
- the third element 770 may include a plurality of sloped surfaces 778 that are configured or adapted to contact a respective one of a plurality of sloped surfaces 748 of second element 740 . Accordingly, as the second element or sliding element 740 translates between the first end 712 and the second end 714 of the base element 710 , the sloped surfaces 748 contact and slide along corresponding respective sloped surfaces 778 of the third element 770 resulting in movement of the third element 770 in a vertical direction, e.g. defined by channels and wall structures between the first element 710 and the third element 770 . Additionally, the movement may be controlled by the sloped surfaces themselves, as discussed below with respect to intervertebral device 1100 , among others.
- the first element or base element 710 may further include a plurality of engaging elements 736 protruding from a top inner surface of the bottom portion 720 of element 710 .
- Second element 740 may include a plurality of engaging elements 750 , at least one of the elements 750 engaging a respective one of the plurality of engaging elements 736 of the base element 710 . While depicted as being integral to the respective elements 710 , 740 , the engaging elements 736 , 750 may be individual parts attached or affixed to the surfaces of the base element 710 and sliding element 740 , respectively.
- the engaging elements 736 , 750 are depicted as having similar shapes, e.g., triangular portions, however in other configurations, the shapes can be dissimilar, or may be nonsymmetrical along its vertical central axis, passing through the tip of each element 736 , 750 .
- the intervertebral device 700 is configured such that applying a linear or axial force to the sliding element 740 to translate the element 740 between the first and second ends 712 , 714 of base member 710 , results in each engaging element 750 sliding up and over a corresponding engaging element 736 , and engaging an adjacent engaging element 736 in the direction of the movement of sliding element 740 .
- sliding element 740 while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of the base element 710 , also moves vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of the engaging elements 750 , 736 of the sliding element 740 and base element 710 , respectively.
- the engaging elements 750 , 736 are positioned within the intervertebral device 700 to better allow for free movement of the various elements 710 , 740 , 770 , prior to application of one or more therapeutic agents, for example.
- the intervertebral device 700 may include a plurality of pins 745 coupled to sliding member 740 and extending through corresponding openings 728 in the side portions 716 , 718 of base element 710 .
- the sliding element 740 With the intervertebral device 700 in the collapsed configuration, as depicted in FIG. 2 , the sliding element 740 is nearer the first end 712 , the pins 745 being nearer the first end 712 , as well.
- the sliding element 740 With the intervertebral device 700 in the expanded configuration, as depicted in FIG. 3 , the sliding element 740 is nearer the distal end or second end 714 , the pins 745 being nearer the second end 714 , as well.
- the openings 728 of the first element 710 are spaced to allow some vertical travel of the sliding element 740 and pins 745 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of the engaging elements 750 , 736 . It is noted that by adjusting the slope of each side surface of the engaging elements 750 , 736 the translational force to move the sliding element 740 in the presence of a compression force between the top portion 771 of element 770 and the bottom portion 720 of the base element 710 may differ in accordance with the corresponding element 750 , 736 sloped surfaces.
- each side surface of the engaging elements 750 , 736 which may be linear or may be nonlinear, may be configured to encourage movement of the sliding element 740 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 710 with respect to the sliding element 740 in a second opposite direction.
- the engaging elements 750 , 736 are configured, e.g., with suitable sloped surfaces or the like, to become locked or immovable when a compression force exists between the third element 770 and the base element 710 .
- the sliding element 740 may include a protrusion 744 configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion or groove 736 A along the inner wall of the third element 770 .
- the protrusion 744 cooperates with recessed portion 736 A such that when the sliding element 740 translates in a proximal direction, in a direction toward proximal end 712 of the intervertebral device for example, the surfaces of the protrusion 744 may engage surfaces of the recessed portion 736 A to encourage the third element 770 to move vertically toward the first element 710 .
- the engaging elements 750 , 736 In the presence of a linear force applied to sliding element 740 moving the element 740 toward end 714 , in a ratcheting manner, for example, the engaging elements 750 , 736 continuously engage and disengage with adjacent opposing engaging elements 750 , 736 .
- the third element 770 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H 7 , of the device 700 .
- the engaging elements 750 , 736 of the sliding element 740 and base element 710 respectively, engage and prevent the sliding element 740 from further translating.
- the sliding element 740 of the intervertebral device 700 may be translated through the use of a tool, such as exemplary delivery system 800 described below, the protrusion 730 P and groove 730 G of the base element 710 adapted to interface with the delivery system 800 , for example.
- the intervertebral device 700 is depicted in elevation cut view along section B-B, a longitudinal centerline, of FIG. 1 .
- the intervertebral device 700 is depicted in a collapsed configuration in FIG. 4 and an expanded configuration in FIG. 5 .
- the sliding element 740 includes a retention device 760 to aide in maintaining contact between the engaging element 750 , 736 of the sliding element 740 and base element 710 , respectively.
- the retention device 760 includes a pin 745 A and a spring 747 , the spring 747 seated in a corresponding bore 746 .
- the pin 745 A may extend from a first opening 723 in side portion 716 to a second opening 723 in side portion 718 (not shown).
- the pin 745 A includes a protrusion 762 that extends from a central longitudinal axis of the pin 745 A toward the bottom 720 of the first element 710 .
- the engaging elements 750 , 736 repeatedly engage and disengage resulting in the sliding element 740 repeatedly moving vertically away from and toward to the bottom portion 720 of the base element 710 .
- the ends of the pin 745 A engage the top surfaces of the corresponding openings 723 in respective side portions 716 , 718 , acting to compress the spring 747 .
- the spring imparts a force upon the sliding element 740 to encourage re-engagement of the adjacent engaging elements 750 , 736 .
- the engaging elements 750 are biased to remain coupled to corresponding engaging elements 736 during each movement of the sliding element 740 , particularly in a no-load situation, where the force between the third element 770 and the first element 710 is minimal, for example.
- engaging elements 750 , 736 maintain the current position of all three elements 710 , 740 , 770 and, ultimately, the current height, H 7 , of the intervertebral device 700 .
- a delivery system 800 for positioning and operating intervertebral device 700 includes an attachment assembly 810 and an expansion tool 860 .
- the attachment assembly 810 is utilized for attaching an intervertebral device, such as intervertebral device 700 , to the delivery system 800 .
- the expansion tool 860 is utilized for setting a height of the intervertebral device 700 once the device 700 has been deployed, between adjacent vertebrae for example.
- the attachment assembly 810 may include an interface unit 812 , a control assembly 820 , a grasper unit 840 , and an elongate member 814 that extends from the control assembly 820 to the grasper unit 840 .
- the interface unit 812 is configured to attach the attachment assembly 810 to the expansion tool 860 , as is discussed in greater detail below.
- the elongate member 814 may be of any suitable length to allow for placement of an intervertebral device at a desired location within a patient, while allowing for control from a point external to the patient.
- the elongate member 814 may include one or more lumens or members therein for controlling the grasper unit 840 or the intervertebral device 700 , or for transmission of therapeutic agents to a corresponding void within the intervertebral device, such as void 702 of the device 700 .
- the grasper unit 840 includes a housing 842 having first and second pairs of slots 842 A S1 , 842 A S2 , 842 B S1 , 842 B S2 , and a control ring 844 operational coupled to first and second arms 846 A, 846 B.
- the elongate member 814 may be fixedly coupled to the housing 842 via pins 815 , for example.
- An elongate member 816 passes through a lumen of the elongate member 814 , and includes a threaded portion 816 T that is rotationally coupled to threaded portion 844 T of the control ring 844 .
- First arm 846 A includes first and second protrusions 846 A P1 , 846 A P2 positioned within the first pair of slots 842 A S1 , 842 A S2 , respectively, and a third protrusion 846 A P3 at a distal tip of the arm 846 A.
- second arm 846 B includes first and second protrusions 846 B P1 , 846 B P2 positioned within the second pair of slots 842 B S1 , 842 B S2 , respectively, and a third protrusion 846 B P3 at a distal tip of the arm 846 B.
- slots 842 B S1 , 842 B S2 are depicted as part of the grasper unit 840 .
- Slots 842 A S1 , 842 A S2 are similar to slots 842 B S1 , 842 B S2 , respectively, and are located on the opposite side of grasper unit 840 .
- arm 846 A includes a raised portion 848 A configured to engage a surface of housing 842 .
- the raised portion 848 A includes a surface 848 A S configured to engage a surface 843 A S of the housing.
- arm 846 B includes a raised portion 848 B having a surface 848 A S configured to engage a surface 843 A S of the housing 842 . Accordingly, as the housing 842 moves distally relative to the arms 846 A, 846 B, a distance between the protrusions 846 A P3 , 846 B P3 increases.
- FIGS. 8 and 9 depict the arms 846 A, 846 B in an open configuration
- FIGS. 10 and 11 depict the arms 846 A, 846 B in a closed configuration, the arms 846 A, 846 B being closer to each other in the open configuration than in the closed configuration.
- rotation of the elongate member 816 in a first direction results in axial movement of the control ring 844 as indicated by arrow 844 A.
- control ring 844 Since the control ring 844 is coupled to the arms 846 A, 846 B, the arms move in the same direction as the control ring, and the surfaces 848 A S , 848 B S cooperate with surfaces 843 A S , 843 B S of housing 842 to move the arms apart from each other, e.g., transitioning to a closed configuration for example.
- Continued axial movement of the control ring results in moving the arms 846 A, 846 B axially to clamp onto the proximal features 730 PA and 730 PB.
- Rotation of the elongate member 816 in a second direction opposite to the first direction results in axial movement of the control ring 844 in a direction opposite to that indicated by arrow 844 A.
- control ring 844 moves distally with respect to housing 842 , as well as arms 846 A, 846 B, distal surfaces of protrusions 846 A P2 , 846 B P2 engage or cooperate with distal portions of slots 842 A S2 , 842 B S2 , respectively, to deflect the arms inward. Accordingly, the more the arms 846 A, 846 B move distally with respect to the housing 842 , the more the distal protrusions 846 A P3 , 846 B P3 move distally and toward to each other, disengaging from the attachment point, and being free from the profile of the protrusions 730 PA and 730 PB, of the intervertebral device 700 .
- the housing may include pins that travel in slots within the arms 846 A, 846 B (not shown), the slots configured to interfere and deflect the arms 846 A, 846 B as they translate distally or proximately.
- the pins may be attached to the arms 846 A, 846 B, and configured to move within corresponding slots in the housing to achieve the desired deflection.
- FIGS. 12A-12C the interaction between the control ring 844 , arms 846 A, 846 B, and the elongate member 816 is depicted.
- the control ring 844 includes first and second “T” slots 845 , each coupled to a proximal end of one of the arms 846 A, 846 B, as depicted in FIG. 12B .
- the coupling point between the slots 845 and the arms 846 A, 846 B allows for the distal protrusions 846 A P3 , 846 B P3 to move toward and away from each other to enable a position for coupling between the arms 846 A, 846 B and the intervertebral device 700 .
- FIG. 12C depicts the control ring 844 rotatably coupled to the elongate tube 816 .
- the interface unit 812 is fixedly attached to the control assembly 820 , and the control assembly 820 is fixedly attached to elongate member 814 .
- the control assembly 820 includes a rotatable control 824 , a clutch assembly 826 , and a spring 828 .
- the rotatable control 824 is rotationally attached to a clutch member 826 A, as part of a clutch assembly 826 .
- a clutch member 826 B is fixedly attached to elongate member 816 .
- the spring 828 provides a force to encourage coupling between clutch member 826 A and clutch member 826 B at fingers 826 F.
- the fingers 826 F are configured such that rotation of the rotatable control 824 in a first direction results in constant engagement of the fingers, and rotation of the rotatable control 824 in a second direction opposite to the first direction results in the fingers of clutch member 826 A slipping past the fingers of clutch member 826 B once the rotational torque becomes greater than the force applied by the spring 828 on the clutch member 826 A. In this way, rotation of the rotatable control 824 in the second direction results in the arms 846 A, 846 B coupling to the attachment point of the intervertebral device 700 , without over-tightening the connection which may result in undue stress in the delivery system 800 or the intervertebral device 700 , or both. It should be understood that the interface of the fingers 826 F may be adapted to provide a desired rotational torque such that the fingers of the clutch members 826 A, 826 B slip.
- the expansion tool 860 includes a handle or handle portion 862 and an elongate shaft 900 rotatably coupled to the handle 862 .
- the expansion tool 860 is utilized for moving the second element, for example the second element 740 of the intervertebral device 700 , along a longitudinal axis of the first element 710 to set a height of the intervertebral device 700 once the device 700 has been deployed, between adjacent vertebrae for example.
- handle portion 862 is depicted in section view and includes an interface assembly 870 and an attachment control 880 .
- the interface assembly 870 is configured to attach or interface the handle portion 862 with the attachment assembly 810 . More specifically, the interface assembly 870 interfaces with the interface element 812 of the attachment assembly 810 .
- the interface assembly 870 includes a pushbutton 872 in a slotted portion 873 of the handle 862 .
- the pushbutton 872 is biased by a spring 874 , which is positioned within a bore 864 of the handle 862 .
- the interface element 812 of the attachment assembly 810 may be positioned within an opening 866 within the handle 862 .
- the interface element 812 includes a notch 812 N sized to be equal to or greater than a width of the pushbutton 872 , such that once the interface element 812 is positioned within the opening 866 the pushbutton 872 may be released and a portion 872 A of the pushbutton 872 is positioned within the notch 812 N, as depicted in FIG. 15B .
- Attachment control 880 is utilized to engage the second element, for example second element 740 , with the elongate shaft 900 .
- the control 880 includes a lever 882 rotatably coupled to the shaft 900 , the lever 882 being configured to rotate the shaft to enable engagement of the shaft 900 with the second element 740 .
- the control 880 may further include a slide lock 884 , which is configured to lock the lever control 882 such that the shaft 900 is maintained in a desired rotational orientation, during operation of an intervertebral device for example.
- a distal end 902 of elongate shaft 900 includes a protrusion 904 adjacent to a groove 906 .
- the protrusion 904 may be adapted to fit a corresponding groove 740 G at a proximal end of the sliding element 740 .
- the shaft 900 is angled or rotated along its axis such that the protrusion 904 freely enters the proximal end of the sliding element 740 .
- the shaft 900 may be rotated, through operation of the attachment control 880 for example, such that the protrusion 904 is positioned within the groove 740 G and held in place through the cooperation of the protrusion 904 and a protrusion 740 P at the proximal end of sliding or third element 740 , as depicted in FIG. 46B .
- the groove 740 G of the sliding element 740 cooperates with the protrusion 904 of the shaft 900 to rigidly attach the shaft 900 to the element 740 .
- the handle 862 may also include an axial control 890 configured to translate the shaft 900 in proximal and distal directions, in a manner similar to how the elongate member 816 translates, for example.
- the axial control 890 includes a rotational control 892 rotationally coupled to a short shaft 894 , the short shaft 894 having threaded portion 894 T that interfaces with corresponding threaded portion 862 T of the handle 862 , the short shaft 894 being coupled to the shaft 900 .
- FIG. 17 depicts handle 862 without the rotational control 892 .
- Shaft 900 is axially coupled, not rotationally coupled, to the short shaft 894 .
- the axial control 890 converts rotational movement of the rotational control 892 into axial movement of the shaft 900 .
- the rotational control 892 is rotated in a first direction the short shaft 894 rotates and moves distally within the handle portion 862 , which acts to move shaft 900 distally.
- the rotational control 892 is rotated in a second direction the short shaft 894 rotates and moves proximally within the handle portion 862 , which acts to move shaft 900 proximally.
- translation of the shaft 900 results in the translation of the sliding element 740 , further resulting in the sliding element 740 moving between the ends 712 , 714 of the base member 710 .
- the element 770 moves in a vertical direction with respect to the base element 710 to change the overall height, H 7 , of the intervertebral device 700 .
- the axial control 890 may utilize a clutch 826 C, similar to clutch 826 of the control assembly 820 .
- a clutch system may act to limit the axial force of the shaft 900 , which may limit damage to the intervertebral device, or to the patient.
- the delivery system 800 may further include a delivery tool configured to deliver therapeutic agents, such as those therapeutic agents described or contemplated herein, to an intervertebral device, such as those intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, which may be positioned or deployed between adjacent vertebra.
- the delivery tool 1000 may include a guide assembly 1010 and an insertion assembly 1030 , as better viewed in FIG. 20 .
- the guide assembly 1010 may include a handle portion 1012 and a tubular member 1020 , the tubular member having one end fixedly attached to the handle portion 1012 .
- the tubular member 1020 may include a lumen 1022 therethrough, the lumen having an inner diameter 1023 and being in fluid communication with a lumen 1018 passing through the handle portion 1012 .
- the lumen 1018 may include an inner diameter sized similar to the lumen 1022 of the tubular member 1020 at or near where the tubular member 1020 is attached to the handle portion 1012 , and then may increase such that an inner surface 1019 of the lumen 1018 may be configured to accept a portion of the insertion assembly 1030 , as described in greater detail below.
- the handle portion 1012 may also include an interface assembly 1014 , similar to interface assembly 870 of the expansion tool 860 as part of the delivery system 800 , and discussed with respect to FIGS. 15A and 15B above, the interface assembly 1014 configured to attach or interface the handle portion 1012 with the attachment assembly 810 of delivery system 800 , for example. More specifically, the interface assembly 1014 may include a pushbutton 1016 and interface with the interface element 812 of the attachment assembly 810 in a similar fashion as interface assembly 870 , as described in greater detail above with respect to FIGS. 15A and 15B .
- the insertion assembly 1030 is depicted in partial section view and may include a handle portion 1032 , shown in bulbous form, and an elongate member 1040 , which may be fixedly attached at one end to the handle portion 1032 .
- the elongate member 1040 may include a lumen 1042 therethrough and may include an outer diameter sized to allow the member 1040 to translate within the lumen 1022 of elongate member 1020 of the guide assembly 1010 .
- the insertion assembly 1030 may include a plunger assembly 1050 having a plunger control 1052 coupled to an elongate shaft 1054 , which may also be viewed in FIG. 25A , the elongate shaft 1054 sized to translate within the lumen 1042 of tubular member 1040 .
- the handle portion 1032 may include one or more surface protrusions 1034 which may allow better grip and control of the insertion tool 1030 during use. Handle portion 1032 may also include a cylindrical distal portion 1036 , which may be sized to interface with and translate within a portion of the lumen 1018 of handle portion 1012 .
- the plunger assembly 1050 as part of the insertion assembly 1030 , is shown coupled to the guide assembly 1010 .
- the cylindrical distal portion 1036 of the insertion assembly 1030 is slidably positioned within a portion of lumen 1018 of the handle portion 1012 of the guide assembly 1010 .
- the plunger control 1052 is coupled to shaft 1054 and configured to selectively translate within the lumen 1042 of the elongate member 1040 of the insertion assembly 1030 .
- the plunger assembly 1050 may include a retaining ring 1056 , a spring retainer 1058 and a spring 1060 .
- the retaining ring 1056 is fixedly attached to the shaft 1054 and retains the spring retainer 1058 and the spring 1060 about the elongate member when the plunger assembly 1050 is decoupled and removed from the insertion assembly 1030 , for sterilization purposes for example.
- the retaining ring 1056 is fixedly attached to the shaft 1054 and is slidably received within a lumen 1038 of the handle portion 1032 .
- the spring retainer 1058 is slidably coupled to the shaft 1054 and, along with the plunger control 1052 , retains the spring 1060 .
- Spring 1060 allows for momentary movement of the plunger assembly 1050 , as discussed in greater detail below.
- the plunger control 1052 may include one or more tab portions 1052 T, which may be slidably coupled with compatible slot portions 1032 S of the handle portion 1032 .
- a retaining portion 1032 R of the handle portion 1032 may be positioned adjacent to a corresponding slot portion 1032 S and may prevent the decoupling and removal of the plunger assembly 1050 from the insertion assembly 1030 .
- Certain slot portions 1032 S such as specific slot portion 1032 S 1 , may be provided without a retaining portion 1032 R allowing a user to rotate the plunger assembly 1050 with respect to the insertion assembly 1030 , aligning the tabs 1052 T with the corresponding slot portions 1032 S 1 (only one shown in the cross section view of FIGS. 22 and 22 ) allowing for decoupling and removal of the plunger assembly 1050 from the guide assembly 1010 , for purposes of sterilization for example.
- the shaft 1054 of the plunger assembly 1050 may translate within the lumen 1042 of the elongate member 1040 of the insertion assembly 1030 , and may be utilized to deploy one or more therapeutic agents within an intervertebral device, such as one or more of the intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein.
- the applied one or more therapeutic agents may fill the internal voids of the intervertebral device, and exit one or more openings thereof, the therapeutic agents coming into contact with surrounding tissue, vertebral tissue for example.
- the plunger control 1052 may be depressed with respect to the remaining of the plunger assembly 1050 and guide assembly 1010 , a distal end of the elongate shaft 1054 deploying the therapeutic agent.
- FIG. 21 depicts the plunger control 1052 in a rest position
- FIG. 22 depicts the plunger control 1052 in a depressed position. While in the depressed position, the plunger control 1052 may compress the spring 1060 between the spring retainer 1058 and the plunger control 1052 . When application force is removed from the plunger control 1052 , the spring 1060 acts to move the plunger control 1052 back to its resting position, as depicted in FIG. 21 . It should be noted that the various characteristics of the plunger assembly 1050 and the insertion assembly 1030 may be modified to provide a desired amount of travel of the elongate shaft 1054 when the plunger control 1052 is depressed, resulting in a corresponding amount of therapeutic agent deployed for example.
- FIG. 23A depicts, for illustration purposes only, the attachment assembly 810 coupled to the intervertebral device 700 , the expansion tool 860 being detached from the attachment assembly 810 and the guide assembly 1010 being inserted into the attachment assembly 810 in place thereof.
- the guide assembly 1010 may be attached or coupled to the attachment assembly 810 in similar fashion as the expansion tool 860 is attached to the attachment assembly 810 , as described above.
- the insertion assembly 1030 may be coupled to the guide assembly 1010 , as generally depicted in FIG. 23B .
- the insertion assembly 1030 may be coupled to the guide assembly 1010 prior to coupling the guide assembly 1010 with the attachment assembly 810 , if desired.
- FIG. 23A depicts, for illustration purposes only, the attachment assembly 810 coupled to the intervertebral device 700 , the expansion tool 860 being detached from the attachment assembly 810 and the guide assembly 1010 being inserted into the attachment assembly 810 in place thereof.
- the guide assembly 1010 may be attached or coupled to the attachment assembly 810 in similar
- 24A depicts the insertion assembly 1030 fully coupled to the guide assembly 1010 , the cylindrical distal portion 1036 of the insertion assembly slidably positioned within a portion of the lumen 1018 of the handle portion 1012 of the guide assembly 1010 .
- a distal end 1040 D of the elongate member 1040 may be adjacent to an opening of the intervertebral device 700 .
- the lumen 1022 of the elongate member 1020 of the guide assembly 1010 may be filled with a desired amount of therapeutic agent.
- a measured amount of the therapeutic agent may be positioned within the lumen 1018 and advanced within lumen 1022 of the elongate member 1020 .
- Insertion or coupling of the insertion assembly 1030 with the guide assembly 1010 may then result in the deployment of a portion of the therapeutic agent within the intervertebral device 700 , e.g., within void 702 , and out of the various openings of the device 700 and into contact with surrounding biological tissue.
- the insertion assembly 1030 may be removed from the guide assembly 1010 to allow insertion of additional therapeutic agent material into the lumen 1022 of the elongate member 1020 , if desired, the additional material deployed by the plunger assembly 1050 as described immediately above.
- FIG. 25A a sectional view of the attachment assembly 810 is depicted.
- the plunger control 1052 is depicted in a depressed position, a distal tip 1054 D of the elongate shaft 1054 advancing into the intervertebral device 700 , e.g., into the void 702 .
- additional portions of the one or more therapeutic agents positioned within the distal portion of the lumen 1022 of the guide assembly 1010 may be advanced by the distal tip 1054 D of the elongate shaft 1054 , as generally represented by arrows 1054 A in FIG. 25B .
- Utilization of the guide assembly 1010 and insertion assembly 1030 , in conjunction with the attachment assembly 810 , to deploy one or more therapeutic agents to an intervertebral device and surrounding biological tissue is advantageous. Once the intervertebral device is positioned, the expansion tool 860 may be removed and the various structures of the attachment assembly 810 may now be utilized to deploy one or more of the therapeutic agents, as described above. In this way, the attachment assembly 810 may serve multiple functions in operative procedures making such procedures easier to perform, and safer and less costly for the patient.
- another exemplary intervertebral device 1100 includes a first or base element 1110 , a second or sliding element 1140 , and a third element 1170 .
- the intervertebral device 1100 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, however, the third element 1170 is adapted to also rotate with respect to the other elements 1110 , 1140 , in particular, rotate about a line generally perpendicular to a longitudinal access of the intervertebral device 1100 .
- the top surface 1171 may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions 1171 C1 , 1171 C2 , 1171 C3 , 1171 C4 , respectively, and 1171 C collectively.
- the second element 1140 and the third element 1170 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1171 c of the top surface 1171 move at one of a plurality of rates as the second element 1140 translates with respect to the third element 1170 .
- the third element 1170 may have a top planar surface that rotates, or otherwise is angled, with respect to a bottom planar surface of the base element 1110 as the sliding element 1140 translates from a proximal position to a distal position.
- a top planar surface of the third element 1170 may be initially angled with respect to a bottom planar surface of the base element 1110 , such that when the third element 1170 is elevated, its top planar surface may form a complex angle with respect to a bottom planar surface of the base element 1110 .
- the intervertebral device 1100 includes a proximal end 1112 and a distal end 1114 , and the proximal end 1112 may include a structure used for positioning and operating the device 1100 , through use of the attachment assembly 810 for example.
- FIGS. 27 and 28 in which perspective views of the exemplary intervertebral device 1100 is depicted in cut view along section A-A of FIG. 26 .
- the elements 1110 , 1140 , 1170 cooperate such that the intervertebral device 1100 geometric height, H 8 , may have a minimum height in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 27 , and a maximum height in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 28 .
- the first element 1110 also referred to as base 1110 or base element 1110 , may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for the intervertebral device 1100 , and includes a first end 1112 , a second end 1114 , and two side portions, a first side portion 1116 (as shown in FIG. 26 ) and an opposing side portion 1118 .
- a bottom portion 1120 includes one or more openings 1122 , allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example.
- the second and third elements 1140 , 1170 may also include similar openings for the same or differing purposes.
- the proximal end 1112 may include an opening 1130 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking the intervertebral device 1100 in a specific configuration, for example.
- utilizing a single connecting point on the device 1100 for interfacing with a tool that can allow for other tools to be easily attached, tools for expanding, contracting or locking the device 1100 in a specific configuration, or tools for delivery of therapeutic materials provides for a more efficient system, allowing a user to more easily place, position, manipulate, and operate the device 1100 .
- the intervertebral device 1100 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H 8 , between a first collapsed height H 8-1 , as depicted in FIG. 27 , and second expanded heights H 8-2P and H 8-2D , as depicted in FIG. 28 .
- H 8 any suitable height
- the third element 1170 is configured to rotate with respect to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 as the intervertebral device 1100 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration, a distal portion of the third element 1170 may have a second height H 8-2D and a proximal portion of the third element 1170 may have a second height H 8-2P .
- the intervertebral device 1100 may be expanded from a first position, having a height of H 8-1 as depicted in FIG. 27 , to a second position, having a maximum distal height of H 8-2D and a maximum proximal height of H 8-2P as depicted in FIG. 28 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that position.
- the proximal end 1112 may also include structures, such as protrusions 1130 P and grooves 1130 G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect to delivery device 800 of FIG. 6 , for example. Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning the intervertebral device 1100 , for example between two adjacent vertebrae.
- the delivery system 800 may include tubular members through which tools to operate the device 1100 , i.e., expand or contract the intervertebral device 1100 , or deliver one or more therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within the intervertebral device 1100 and exiting through the one or more openings 1122 of the element 1110 or one or more openings 1172 of element 1170 , or additional similar openings of the elements 1110 , 1140 , 1170 . In this way, such therapeutic agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue, encouraging healing.
- the tubular members to perform these functions may be the same tubular member or different tubular members.
- the third element 1170 may be slidably interfaced to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 such that the third element 1170 at least slides vertically with respect to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 .
- the third element 1170 may include one or more openings 1172 in the top portion or surface 1171 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough.
- the top portion 1171 may include one or more protrusions 1174 that may aide in holding the top portion 1171 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only a few protrusions 1174 are identified, additional or less protrusions 1174 may be utilized.
- protrusion structures 1174 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form. Additionally, sidewalls 1116 , 1118 of element 1110 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and a bottom portion or surface 1120 of base 1110 may include one or more protrusions 1121 . Protrusions 1121 may be, for example, similar to protrusions 1174 , which may aide in holding a bottom portion 1120 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example.
- the first element 1110 may include a positioning structure or protrusion 1124 , which may be configured or adapted to move within a corresponding channel 1176 to ensure the third element 1170 moves in a specific direction with respect to the base element 1110 .
- the protrusion 1124 and corresponding channel 1176 may be curvilinear to allow for rotation of the third element 1170 with respect to the second element 1140 as the second element 1140 translates.
- a void or space 1102 is defined by the first, second, and third elements 1110 , 1140 , 1170 of the intervertebral device 1100 , the void 1102 increasing as the device 1100 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within the void 1102 .
- such therapeutic agents may further flow out of the void 1102 via additional openings, such as openings 1172 and 1122 , positioned about the elements 1110 , 1140 , 1170 .
- the third element 1170 of intervertebral device 1100 at least rotates with respect to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 .
- the intervertebral device 1100 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second and third elements 1140 , 1170 , however the surfaces of the intervertebral device 1100 may be curvilinear to encourage at least rotational movement of the third element 1170 with respect to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 .
- Such curvilinear surfaces may allow for portions of the third element 1170 to move at different rates with respect to other portions thereof, while maintaining constant or near constant surface contact between the curvilinear surfaces of the third element 1170 and the second element 1140 .
- the third element 1170 may include a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1178 that are configured or adapted to come in contact along a respective one of a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1148 of second element 1140 .
- Curvilinear surfaces 1178 may include a first pair of curvilinear surfaces 1178 A and a second par of curvilinear surfaces 1178 B and these curvilinear surfaces may interface with corresponding curvilinear surfaces 1148 A, 1148 B of the second element 1140 , respectively.
- the curvilinear surfaces 1148 of the second element 1140 contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1178 of the third element 1170 resulting in movement of the element 1170 in at least a vertical direction.
- curvilinear surfaces includes surfaces of any length down to a point surface. Accordingly, and for illustration purposes only, one or more of the curvilinear surfaces 1148 of the sliding element 1140 may be point surfaces, or otherwise surfaces having dimensions that minimalize into a point contact, that contact and interact with a respective one of the curvilinear surfaces 1178 of the third element 1170 . Alternatively, one or more of the curvilinear surfaces 1178 may be point surfaces, or otherwise surfaces having dimensions that minimalize into a point contact, that contact and interact with a respective one of the curvilinear surfaces 1148 of the sliding element 1140 . It should be noted that increase contact surface area between the curvilinear surfaces 1148 , 1178 may lead to increased strength.
- translation of sliding element 1140 from the first end 1112 toward the second end 1114 results in movement of the element 1170 in at least a vertical direction away from the base element 1110 , the third element 1170 rotating with respect to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 .
- Translation of the sliding element 1140 in a direction from the second end 1114 toward the first end 1112 results in movement of the element 1170 in at least a vertical direction toward the base element 1110 , the third element 1170 once again rotating with respect to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 , the top surface 1171 of the third element 1170 being substantially parallel with the bottom surface 1120 of the first element 1110 when the device 1100 returns to its collapsed configuration.
- Curvilinear surfaces 1148 A of the second element 1140 and curvilinear surfaces 1178 A of the third element 1170 may define a first circle having a radius R 1 (not shown), while curvilinear surface 1148 B of the second element and curvilinear surface 1178 B of the third element 1170 may define a second circle having a radius R 2 (not shown), which is greater than the radius R 1 .
- First and second circles are concentric allowing for all interfacing surfaces to be in intimate contact during activation. As the second element 1140 moves distally, differences in radii R 1 and R 2 result in portions of the third element 1170 moving vertically at differing rates.
- corner portions 1171 C1 and 1171 C2 of the third element 1170 may move vertically at a faster rate than corner portions 1171 C3 and 1171 C4 of the third element 1170 , resulting in at least rotational movement of the third element 1170 with respect to the first and second elements 1110 , 1140 .
- a maximum height of the third element 1170 is H 8-2D and a minimum height of the third element 1170 is H 8-2P , the top surface 1171 of the third element 1170 forming an angle LA 8 with respect to a bottom surface of the base element 1110 .
- the height H 8-2D may have a maximum of 12 mm
- the height H 8-2P may have a maximum range from between 7 mm to about 12 mm, depending on the desired angle LA 8 , which may range from between about 0° to about 15°.
- the radii R 1 and R 2 may be selected to provide for larger or smaller rates of rotation of the third element 1170 with respect to the first element 1110
- the first element or base element 1110 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1136 that protrude from a top inner surface of the bottom portion 1120 of element 1110 .
- Second element 1140 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1150 , at least one of the elements 1150 engaging a respective one of the plurality of engaging elements 1136 . While depicted as being integral to the respective elements 1110 , 1140 , the engaging elements 1136 , 1150 may be individual parts attached or affixed to the surfaces of the base element 1110 and sliding element 1140 , respectively.
- the engaging elements 1136 , 1150 are depicted as having similar shapes, e.g., triangular portions, however in other configurations, the shapes can be dissimilar, or may be nonsymmetrical along its vertical central axis, passing through the tip of each element 1136 , 1150 .
- the intervertebral device 1100 may be configured such that applying a linear force to the sliding element 1140 to translate the element 1140 between the first and second ends 1112 , 1114 of base member 1110 , results in each engaging element 1150 sliding up and over a corresponding engaging element 1136 , and engaging an adjacent engaging element 1136 in the direction of the movement of sliding element 1140 .
- sliding element 1140 while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of the base element 1110 , may also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 of the sliding element 1140 and base element 1110 , respectively.
- the intervertebral device 1100 may further include a plurality of pins 1145 coupled to sliding member 1140 and extending through corresponding openings 1128 in the side portions 1116 , 1118 of base element 1110 , the openings 1128 may be similar to openings 728 of the intervertebral device 700 .
- the intervertebral device 1100 in the collapsed configuration as depicted in FIG. 27 , the sliding element 1140 is nearer the first end 1112 , the pins 1145 being nearer the first end 1112 , as well.
- the intervertebral device 1100 in the expanded configuration as depicted in FIG.
- the sliding element 1140 is nearer the distal end or second end 1114 , the pins 1145 being nearer the second end 1114 , as well.
- the openings 1128 of the first element 1110 may be spaced to allow some vertical travel of the sliding element 1140 and pins 1145 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 . It is noted that by adjusting the slope or curvilinear shape of each side surface of the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 the translational force to move the sliding element 1140 in the presence of a compression force between the top surface 1171 of element 1170 and the bottom portion 1120 of the base element 1110 may differ in accordance with the corresponding element 1150 , 1136 shaped surfaces.
- each side surface of the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 which may be linear or curvilinear, or a combination thereof, may be configured to encourage movement of the sliding element 1140 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1110 with respect to movement of the sliding element 1140 in a second opposite direction.
- the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 are configured, e.g., with suitable shaped surfaces or the like, to become locked or immovable when a compression force exists between the third element 1170 and the base element 1110 .
- the sliding element 1140 may include a protrusion 1144 configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion or groove 1136 A, 1138 A (not shown) of the third element 1170 .
- the protrusion 1144 may cooperate with recessed portion 1136 A such that when the sliding element 1140 translates in a distal direction, in a direction toward distal end 1114 of the intervertebral device for example, one or more surfaces of the protrusion 1144 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessed portion 1136 A to encourage the third element 1170 to move vertically and rotationally away from the first element 1110 .
- the protrusion 1144 may cooperate with the recessed portion 1136 A such that when the sliding element 1140 translates in a proximal direction, in a direction toward the proximal end 1112 of the intervertebral device 1110 for example, one or surfaces of the protrusion 1144 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessed portion 1136 A to encourage the third element 1170 to move vertically and rotationally toward the first element 1110 .
- the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 continuously engage and disengage with adjacent opposing engaging elements 1150 , 1136 .
- the third element 1170 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H 8 , of the device 1100 .
- the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 of the sliding element 1140 and base element 1110 engage and prevent the sliding element 1140 from further translating.
- the sliding element 1140 of the intervertebral device 1100 may be translated through the use of a tool, such as expansion tool 860 described above for example, the distal portion of the sliding element 1140 including protrusions 1140 P and grooves 1140 G, as best viewed in FIGS. 29 and 30 discussed immediately below, to interface with the expansion tool 860 , for example.
- a tool such as expansion tool 860 described above for example, the distal portion of the sliding element 1140 including protrusions 1140 P and grooves 1140 G, as best viewed in FIGS. 29 and 30 discussed immediately below, to interface with the expansion tool 860 , for example.
- the intervertebral device 1100 is depicted in an elevation via cross-section along section B-B of FIG. 26 .
- the intervertebral device 1100 is depicted in a collapsed configuration in FIG. 29 and in an expanded configuration in FIG. 30 .
- the sliding element 1140 may include a retention device 1160 to aide in maintaining contact between the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 of the sliding element 1140 , as better viewed with respect to FIGS. 27 and 28 , and base element 1110 , respectively.
- the retention device 1160 may include a pin 1145 A and a spring 1147 , both depicted in cross section, the spring 1147 seated in a bore 1146 of the second element 1140 .
- the pin 1145 A may extend from a first opening 1123 in side portion 1116 (not shown) of the base element 1100 to a second opening 1123 in side portion 1118 (not shown) of the base element 1100 .
- the pin 1145 A may include a central protrusion 1162 that extends from a central longitudinal axis of the pin 1145 A toward the bottom 1120 of the first element 1110 within the spring 1147 , retaining the pine 1145 A to the spring 1147 .
- the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 In operation, as the sliding element 1140 translates between the two ends 1112 , 1114 , the engaging elements 1150 , 1136 repeatedly engage and disengage resulting in the sliding element 1140 repeatedly moving vertically away from, and toward to, the bottom portion 1120 of the base element 1110 . As the sliding element 1140 moves away from the base element 1110 the ends of the pin 1145 A may engage the top surfaces of the corresponding openings 1123 in respective side portions 1116 , 1118 , acting to compress the spring 1147 . As the engaging elements 1150 of the sliding element 1140 pass over the corresponding engaging elements 1136 of the base element 1110 the spring 1147 imparts a force upon the sliding element 1140 to encourage re-engagement of the adjacent engaging elements 1150 , 1136 .
- engaging elements 1150 are biased to remain coupled to corresponding engaging elements 1136 during movement of the sliding element 1140 , particularly in a no-load situation, where the force between the third element 1170 and the first element 1110 is minimal, for example. Accordingly, when a compression force is applied between the top surface 1171 of the third element 1170 and the bottom surface 1120 of the base element 1110 , engaging elements 1150 , 1136 maintain the current position of all three elements 1110 , 1140 , 1170 and, ultimately, a current distal height, H 8-D , and a current proximal height, H 8-P , of the intervertebral device 1100 .
- intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein including intervertebral device 1100 , for example, with angular top surfaces to better engage surrounding biological tissues, such as adjacent vertebral structures.
- Such angular top surfaces can allow for such engagement of surrounding biological tissues when positioned with differing methods, including TLIF and PLIF approaches, or other approaches known in the art.
- FIGS. 31A and 31B an alternative intervertebral device 1100 A is depicted in a first collapsed configuration.
- the alternative intervertebral device 1100 A is similar to device 1100 , including a first element 1110 and a second element 1140 , however the intervertebral device 1100 A may include a third element 1170 A in place of third element 1170 .
- the third element 1170 A may be similar to third element 1170 except the third element 1170 A may include a top surface 1171 that forms an angle 1171 A along its longitudinal axis with respect to a top surface of the first element 1110 , as generally depicted.
- FIG. 31A depicts the intervertebral device 1100 A from its proximal end 1112
- FIG. 31B depicts the intervertebral device 1100 A from its distal end 1114 .
- FIG. 31A further depicts void 1102 defined by the first, second and third elements 1100 , 1140 , 1170 and a pair of recesses 1132 that may encourage attachment to a delivery tool, as described in greater detail above.
- FIGS. 32A and 32B depict the intervertebral device 1100 A in its expanded configuration.
- the third element 1170 A includes an angled top surface 1171 and the third element 1170 A rotates with respect to the second element 1140 as the device 1100 A expands
- the top surface 1171 of the third element 1170 A takes on a planar surface that is angled with respect to both a longitudinal axis and a lateral axis of the intervertebral device 1100 A, the angle offset along the longitudinal axis being the angle LA 8 as better viewed in FIG. 30
- the angle offset along the lateral axis being the angle 1171 A as best viewed in FIGS. 31A-31B .
- FIGS. 33A and 33B for illustration purposes only, an intervertebral device 1100 A is depicted in its expanded configuration between adjacent vertebral bodies 10 , 12 .
- a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device 1100 A is not parallel to either an anterior axis 14 or a lateral axis 16 of the vertebral bodies 10 , 12 .
- the angles LA 8 and 1171 A cooperate to provide a desirable planar top surface 1171 of third element 1170 A to anatomically match the natural angular differences between the adjacent vertebral bodies 10 , 12 .
- angles LA 8 and 1171 A may be further manipulated to provide for any approach with respect to adjacent vertebral structures, the angles compensating for any naturally occurring angular offsets therebetween.
- the top and bottom surfaces of the intervertebral device 1100 A may make better contract with adjacent vertebral bodies, which may allow for stronger bonds between the intervertebral device 1100 A and the adjacent vertebral bodies.
- angles LA 8 and 1171 A may be oriented differently to allow for differing approaches.
- another exemplary intervertebral device 1200 includes a first or base element 1210 , a second or sliding element 1240 , and a third element 1270 .
- the intervertebral device 1200 is generally similar to intervertebral device 1100 , however, the third element 1270 is adapted to move rotationally and linearly with respect to the other elements 1210 , 1240 .
- the third element 1270 may have a top planar surface 1271 that is angled with respect to a bottom planar surface 1220 of the base element 1210 , the angled surface being able to further move vertically with respect to the base element 1210 to increase the overall height of the intervertebral device 1200 .
- a top planar surface of the third element 1270 may be initially angled with respect to a bottom planar surface of the base element 1210 , such that when the third element 1270 is at least elevated, its top planar surface may form a complex angle with respect to a bottom planar surface of the base element 1210 .
- the intervertebral device 1200 includes a proximal end 1212 and a distal end 1214 , the proximal end 1212 including geometric structures 1230 G, 1230 P used for positioning the intervertebral device 1200 , as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments.
- FIGS. 35, 36, and 37 a perspective view of the exemplary intervertebral device 1200 is depicted in cut view along section A-A of FIG. 34 .
- the elements 1210 , 1240 , 1270 cooperate such that the intervertebral device 1200 geometric height, H 9 , may have a minimum value when the device 1200 is in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 35 , an intermediate value when the device 1200 is in an intermediate configuration, one example of which is generally depicts in FIG. 36 , and a maximum when the device 1200 is in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 37 , and discussed in greater detail below.
- the first element 1210 also referred to as base 1210 or base element 1210 , may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for the intervertebral device 1200 , and includes first end 1212 , second end 1214 , and two side portions, a first side portion 1216 (not shown) and an opposing side portion 1218 .
- a bottom portion 1220 includes one or more openings 1222 allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example.
- the second and third elements 1240 , 1270 may also include similar openings for the same or differing purposes.
- the proximal end 1212 may include an opening 1230 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking the intervertebral device 1200 in a specific configuration, for example.
- Such one or more tools may include delivery system 800 and the delivery tool 1000 .
- the intervertebral device 1200 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H 9 , between a first collapsed height H 9-1 , as depicted in FIG. 35 , second expanded heights H 9-2P and H 9-2D , as depicted generally in FIG. 36 , and third expanded heights H 9-3P and H 9-3D , as depicted in FIG. 37 .
- the third element 1270 is configured to rotate and linearly move with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 , when the intervertebral device 1200 is in an expanded configuration, a distal portion of the third element 1270 may have a first height H 9-3D and a proximal portion of the third element 1270 may have a second height H 9-3P .
- the intervertebral device 1200 may be at least rotationally expanded from a first position, having the height of H 9-1 as depicted in FIG. 35 , to a second position, having a distal height of H 9-2D and a proximal height of H 9-2P as depicted in FIG. 36 , and then linearly expanded to a third position, having a distal height of H 9-3D and a proximal height of H 9-3D as depicted in FIG. 37 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that position.
- the proximal end 1212 of the intervertebral device 1200 may also include structures, such as protrusions 1230 P and grooves 1230 G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect to delivery device 800 of FIG. 6 , for example. Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning the intervertebral device 1200 , for example between two adjacent vertebrae, through an approach described or contemplated herein, or otherwise known in the art.
- the delivery system 800 may include tubular members through which therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within the intervertebral device 1200 and exiting through the one or more openings 1222 of the element 1210 or one or more openings 1272 of the element 1270 , or other similar openings of the elements 1210 , 1240 , 1270 .
- therapeutic agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue, encouraging healing.
- the third element 1270 may be slidably interfaced to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 such that the third element 1270 at least rotates and/or slides vertically with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 .
- the top portion 1271 may include one or more protrusions 1274 that may aide in holding the top surface 1271 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example. While only a few protrusions 1274 are identified, additional or less protrusions 1274 may be utilized.
- protrusion structures 1274 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form and may be applied to any embodiment described or contemplated herein.
- sidewalls 1216 , 1218 of element 1210 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and a bottom portion 1220 of base 1210 may include one or more protrusions 1221 .
- Protrusions 1221 may be, for example, similar to or different from protrusions 1274 , and may aide in holding a bottom portion 1220 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures.
- the element 1210 may include a positioning structure or protrusion 1224 , which may be configured or adapted to move within a corresponding channel 1276 A to ensure that the element 1270 moves in a specific manner with respect to the base element 1210 .
- a void or space 1202 is defined by the first, second, and third elements 1210 , 1240 , 1270 of the intervertebral device 1200 , the void increasing as the device 1200 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within the void 1202 , via the delivery system 800 of FIG. 6 , for example. Such therapeutic agents may further flow out of the open space via additional openings, such as openings 1272 and 1222 , or other openings positioned about the elements 1210 , 1240 , 1270 .
- the third element 1270 of intervertebral device 1200 at least rotates and moves linearly with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 .
- the intervertebral device 1200 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second and third elements 1240 , 1270 , however the surfaces of the intervertebral device 1200 may include both curvilinear and linear portions to encourage at least rotational movement and linear movement of the third element 1270 with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 .
- Such curvilinear and linear surfaces may allow for various portions of the third element 1270 to move at different rates with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 , for at least a portion of its operation.
- the top surface 1271 may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1271 C1 , 1271 C2 , 1271 C3 , 1271 C4 , respectively, and 1271 C collectively.
- the second element 1240 and the third element 1270 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1270 C of the top surface 1171 move at one of a plurality of rates as the second element 1240 translates a first distance with respect to the third element 1270 , and similar rates as the second element 1240 translates a second distance with respect to the third element 1270 .
- the third element 1270 may include one or more curvilinear surfaces 1278 A and two or more linear surfaces 1278 B, 1278 C.
- the curvilinear surface 1278 A may be configured or adapted to contact along a respective one of a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1248 A of second element 1240
- the two or more linear surfaces 1278 B, 1278 C may be configured or adapted to come in contact with a portion of one of a plurality of linear surfaces 1248 B, 1248 C, respectively.
- the curvilinear surfaces 1248 A contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1278 A of the third element 1270
- the linear surface 1278 C may contact and slide along linear surface 1248 C at a specific location, such as near location 1248 P as best viewed in FIG. 35 , resulting in at least rotational movement of the element 1270 with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 .
- the amount of rotational movement can be defined by adjusting the slope of linear surface 1278 C with respect to a generalized or averaged slope of curvilinear surface 1278 A. While shown as curvilinear, the surface 1278 A may be linear if desired, however a curvilinear surface 1278 A may allow for better contact between the surfaces 1278 A, 1248 A and, therefore, better structural support therebetween.
- Curvilinear surface 1248 A of the second element and curvilinear surface 1278 A of the third element 1270 may define a circle having a radius R, which defines a rate of curvature in conjunction with the slope of linear surface 1278 C and, ultimately, differing rates of vertical movement along the top surface 1271 of the third element 1270 , resulting in a top surface having a slope with respect to the bottom surface 1220 of the first element 1210 . Therefore, the portion of the third element 1270 more distal may increase in height at a faster rate than the portion of the third element 1270 more proximal, resulting in rotational movement of the third element 1270 with respect to the base element 1210 .
- the third element 1270 rotates with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 , until linear surface 1248 B comes into contact with surface 1278 B, as can be viewed in FIG. 36 .
- linear surface 1248 C may contact linear surface 1278 C along a greater portion than what is represented by point 1248 P of FIG. 35 , for example.
- an angle LA 9 is defined by the top surface 1271 of third element 1270 with respect to the bottom surface 1220 of the base element 1210 .
- Angle LA 9 may be the maximum angle achieved, the third element 1270 moving in the vertical direction upon further translation of the second element 1240 toward the distal end 1214 of the intervertebral device 1200 , for example. It should be noted that this angle LA 9 may be defined through differing curvilinear surfaces. For example, curvilinear surfaces 1278 A, 1248 A may have different rates of curvature and the linear surfaces 1278 C, 1248 C may have different slopes compared to what is depicted in FIGS. 65-67 , each combination resulting in one of numerous different angles defined by the top surface 1271 of the third element 1270 and bottom surface 1220 of the first element 1210 . Such different angles may be greater than or less than angle LA 9 , for example.
- the intervertebral device 1200 may have a proximal height H 9-2P and a distal height H 9_2D .
- the void 1202 may have increased due to the expansion of the intervertebral device 1200 through initial rotational movement of the third element 1270 with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 .
- surfaces 1248 B, 1248 C of the second element 1240 move along linear surfaces 1278 B, 1278 C of the third element 1270 , respectively, resulting in at least continued vertical movement of the third element 1270 with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 .
- surfaces 1248 B, 1278 B, 1248 C, 1278 C may be curvilinear surfaces, such that the third element 1270 continues to rotate, as well as move vertically, with respect to the base element 1210 .
- the curvilinear surfaces 1248 B, 1278 B, 1248 C, 1278 C may be selected to allow for a rate of rotation that is greater than or less than the initial rate of rotation.
- the third element 1270 reaches a maximum height, as compared to the base element 1210 , for example. Since the third element 1270 first rotated, then moved vertically, with respect to the first and second elements 1210 , 1240 , different points along the top surface 1271 of the third element 1270 moved vertically at different rates. These different rates result in a maximum proximal height H 9-3D and a maximum distal height H 9-3D . Since the motion of the third element 1270 from the configuration depicted in FIG. 36 to the expanded configuration of FIG. 37 is primarily vertical with respect to first and second elements 1210 , 1240 , the angle of the top surface 1271 with respect to the bottom surface 1220 of the first element 1210 , LA 9 , remains relatively constant.
- the first element or base element 1210 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1236 that protrude from a top inner surface of the bottom portion 1220 of element 1210 .
- Second element 1240 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1250 , at least one of the elements 1250 engaging a respective one of the plurality of engaging elements 1236 . While depicted as being integral to the respective elements 1210 , 1240 , the engaging elements 1236 , 1250 may be individual parts attached or affixed to the surfaces of the base element 1210 and sliding element 1240 , respectively.
- the engaging elements 1236 , 1250 are depicted as having similar shapes, e.g., triangular portions, however in other configurations, the shapes can be dissimilar, or may be nonsymmetrical along its vertical central axis, passing through the tip of each element 1236 , 1250 .
- the intervertebral device 1200 is configured such that applying a lateral force to the sliding element 1240 to translate the element 1240 between the first and second ends 1212 , 1214 of base member 1210 , results in each engaging element 1250 sliding up and over a corresponding engaging element 1236 , and engaging an adjacent engaging element 1236 in the direction of the movement of sliding element 1240 .
- sliding element 1240 while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of the base element 1210 , also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 of the sliding element 1240 and base element 1210 , respectively.
- the intervertebral device 1200 may further include a plurality of pins 1245 coupled to sliding member 1240 and extending through corresponding groves 1228 G in the side portions 1216 , 1218 of base element 1210 , the grooves 1228 G being functionally similar to openings 728 of the intervertebral device 700 .
- the sliding element 1240 is nearer the distal end or second end 1214 , the pins 1245 being nearer the second end 1214 , as well.
- the grooves 1228 G of the first element 1210 may be spaced to allow some vertical travel of the sliding element 1240 and pins 1245 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 . It is noted that by adjusting the slope of each side surface of the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 the translational force to move the sliding element 1240 in the presence of a compression force between the top portion 1271 of element 1270 and the bottom portion 1220 of the base element 1210 may differ in accordance with the corresponding element 1250 , 1236 sloped surfaces.
- each side surface of the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 which may be linear, nonlinear, or a combination thereof, may be configured to encourage movement of the sliding element 1240 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1210 with respect to the sliding element 1240 in a second opposite direction.
- the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 are configured, e.g., with suitable sloped surfaces or the like, to become locked or immovable when a compression force exists between the third element 1270 and the base element 1210 .
- the sliding element 1240 may include a protrusion 1244 configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion or groove 1236 A along the inner wall of the third element 1270 .
- the protrusion 1244 may cooperate with recessed portion 1236 A such that when the sliding element 1240 translates in a distal direction, in a direction toward distal end 1214 of the intervertebral device 1200 for example, one or more surfaces of the protrusion 1244 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessed portion 1236 A to encourage the third element 1270 to move vertically and rotationally away from the first element 1210 .
- the protrusion 1244 may cooperate with the recessed portion 1236 A such that when the sliding element 1240 translates in a proximal direction, in a direction toward the proximal end 1212 of the intervertebral device 1200 for example, one or more surfaces of the protrusion 1244 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessed portion 1236 A to encourage the third element 1270 to move vertically and rotationally toward the first element 1210 .
- the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 continuously engage and disengage with adjacent opposing engaging elements 1250 , 1236 .
- the third element 1270 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H 9 , of the intervertebral device 1200 .
- a compression force applied between the third element 1270 and the base element 1210 e.g.
- the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 of the sliding element 1240 and base element 1210 engage and prevent the sliding element 1240 from further translating.
- the sliding element 1240 of the intervertebral device 1200 may be translated through the use of a tool or system, such as exemplary system 800 described above with respect to intervertebral device 700 , the distal portion of the sliding element 1240 including protrusions 1240 P and grooves 1240 G similar to protrusions 740 P and grooves 740 G of the intervertebral device 700 , adapted to interface with the delivery system 800 , for example.
- the intervertebral device 1200 is depicted in cross-section along section B-B of FIG. 34 .
- the intervertebral device 1200 is depicted in a collapsed configuration in FIG. 38 and in a first expanded configuration in FIG. 39 , and a second expanded configuration in FIG. 40 .
- the sliding element 1240 includes a retention device 1260 , as an alternative to the retention device 1160 of intervertebral device 1100 , to aide in maintaining contact between the engaging element 1250 , 1236 of the sliding element 1240 and base element 1210 , respectively.
- the retention device 1260 includes the pin 1245 B and spring 1247 , the spring 1247 depicted in cross section and seated in a bore 1246 .
- the pin 1245 B may extend from a bore 1210 B of the first element 1210 to void 1202 .
- the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 In operation, as the sliding element 1240 translates between the two ends 1212 , 1214 , the engaging elements 1250 , 1236 repeatedly engage and disengage resulting in the sliding element 1240 repeatedly moving vertically away from and toward to the bottom portion 1220 of the base element 1210 , as described above with respect to the intervertebral device 1200 . As the engaging elements 1250 of the sliding element 1240 pass over the corresponding engaging elements 1236 of the base element 1210 the spring 1247 imparts a force upon the sliding element 1240 to encourage re-engagement of the adjacent engaging elements 1250 , 1236 .
- engaging elements 1250 are biased to remain coupled to corresponding engaging elements 1236 during each movement of the sliding element 1240 , particularly in a no-load situation, where the force between the third element 1270 and the first element 1210 is minimal for examples. Accordingly, when a compression force is applied between the top surface 1271 of the third element 1270 and the bottom surface 1220 of the base element 1210 , engaging elements 1250 , 1236 maintain the current position of all three elements 1210 , 1240 , 1270 and, ultimately, the current height, H 9-D , H 9-P of the intervertebral device 1200 .
- the third element 1270 may include an angular top surface to better engage surrounding biological tissues, such as adjacent vertebral structures. Such angular top surfaces can allow for such engagement of surrounding biological tissues when positioned with differing methods, including TLIF and PLIF approaches.
- the various mating curvilinear surfaces of the second and third elements of the various embodiments described herein may be adapted to provide a top surface of the intervertebral device, e.g., the top surface of the third element, at a desired angle with respect to a bottom surface of the intervertebral device, e.g., the bottom surface of the first element or base element.
- a desired angle may be selected in accordance with the approach taken to insert the intervertebral device between two adjacent vertebrae.
- the intervertebral device may be adapted to provide a desired height and angular configuration with respect to a specified approach such that the angular configuration matches the lordotic curvature of the spine, the lumbar or cervical regions of the spine, for example.
- another exemplary intervertebral device 1300 includes a first or base element 1310 , a second or sliding element 1340 , and a third or lifting element 1370 .
- the intervertebral device 1300 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or disclosed herein, however the first, second and third elements 1310 , 1340 , 1370 cooperate such that the third element 1370 is adapted to laterally rotate with respect to the other elements 1320 , 1340 during operation.
- the third element may include a top surface 1371 that may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1371 C1 , 1371 C2 , 1371 C3 , 1371 C4 , respectively, and 1371 C collectively.
- the second element 1340 and the third element 1370 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1370 C of the top surface 1371 move at one of a plurality of rates as the second element 1340 translates with respect to the third element 1370 . More specifically, the first corner portion 1371 C1 and fourth corner portion 1371 C4 may have a first rate, and the second corner portion 1371 C2 and third corner portion 1371 C3 may have a second rate, the second rate being greater than the first rate.
- the third element 1370 may have a top planar surface 1371 that is angled with respect to a bottom planar surface 1320 of the base element 1310 , as better viewed in FIGS. 41B and 41C , when the interventional device 1300 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration, respectively.
- a top surface 1371 of the third element 1370 may be initially angled with respect to a bottom surface 1320 of the base element 1310 when in a collapsed configuration, such that when the third element 1370 is at least elevated a portion, its top planar surface may form a desired angle with respect to the bottom planar surface 1320 of the base element 1310 .
- the intervertebral device 1300 includes a proximal end 1312 and a distal end 1314 , as well as a first lateral side 1316 and a second lateral side 1318 .
- the proximal end 1312 may include geometric structures 1330 G, 1330 P for positioning the intervertebral device 1300 , as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments.
- the first, second, and third elements 1310 , 1340 , 1370 further cooperate to provide an internal open space or void 1302 for deployment of therapeutic agents, as discussed herein.
- FIG. 41B the intervertebral device 1300 is depicted in a collapsed configuration, the elongated shaft 900 of the delivery system 800 engaged with the sliding element 1340 , in accordance with the discussion above with respect to attaching the system 800 to the intervertebral device 700 .
- the grasping unit 840 and associated structures have been removed to allow for a better view of the operation.
- the delivery system 800 may include portions that interface with one or more recesses 1332 to fixedly hold the intervertebral device 1300 in contact with the delivery system 800 , but such portions have been removed for this specific discussion.
- FIG. 41B the intervertebral device 1300 is depicted in a collapsed configuration, the elongated shaft 900 of the delivery system 800 engaged with the sliding element 1340 , in accordance with the discussion above with respect to attaching the system 800 to the intervertebral device 700 .
- the grasping unit 840 and associated structures have been removed to allow for a better view of the operation.
- the sliding or second element 1340 when the elongate shaft 602 is translated toward distal end 1314 of the intervertebral device 1300 , in a direction indicated by arrow 41 C A , the sliding or second element 1340 also translates in a distal direction. As the sliding element 1340 moves distally various surfaces of the sliding element 1340 cooperate with corresponding various surfaces of the lifting element 1370 such that the top surface 1371 moves in a rotationally vertical direction away from the base element 1310 , for example, as described in greater detail below.
- FIGS. 42-45 elevated side views of the exemplary intervertebral device 1300 are depicted in cut view along section A-A of FIG. 41A in FIGS. 42 and 44 and along section B-B of FIG. 41A in FIGS. 43 and 45 .
- the elements 1310 , 1340 , 1370 cooperate such that the intervertebral device 1300 geometric height, H 10 , may have a minimum value, H 10-1 , when the device 1300 is in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted in FIGS. 42 and 43 , a maximum height, H 10-2 , when the device 1300 is in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted in FIGS. 44 and 45 , and an intermediate value, H 10 , when the device 1300 is in an intermediate configuration therebetween.
- the first element 1310 may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for the intervertebral device 1300 , and includes a first end 1312 , a second end 1314 , and two side portions, a first side portion 1316 and an opposing side portion 1318 , as better viewed, for example, in FIG. 41A .
- a bottom portion 1320 of the first element 1310 may include one or more openings 1322 , as depicted also in FIG. 41A , allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example.
- the second and third elements 1340 , 1370 may also include similar openings for the same or differing purposes.
- the proximal end 1312 may include an opening 1330 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking the intervertebral device 1300 in a specific configuration, for example.
- one or more tools may include, or be similar to, delivery system 800 and the delivery tool 1000 .
- the intervertebral device 1300 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H 10 , between a first collapsed height H 10-1 , as depicted in FIG. 72 , for example, and second expanded heights H 10-2R and H 10-2L , as depicted generally in FIGS. 46A and 46B .
- H 10 any suitable height
- first collapsed height H 10-1 as depicted in FIG. 72
- second expanded heights H 10-2R and H 10-2L as depicted generally in FIGS. 46A and 46B .
- a first lateral portion of the third element 1370 may have a first height H 10-2R and a second lateral portion of the third element 1370 may have a second height H 10-2L , as viewed in FIGS.
- the proximal end 1312 may also include structures, such as protrusions 1330 P and grooves 1330 G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect to delivery device 800 of FIG. 6 , for example. Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning the intervertebral device 1300 , for example between two adjacent vertebrae, through an approach described or contemplated herein, or otherwise known in the art.
- the delivery system 800 may include tubular members through which therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within the intervertebral device 1300 and exiting through the one or more openings 1322 of the element 1310 or one or more openings 1372 of the element 1370 , or other similar openings of the elements 1310 , 1340 , 1370 .
- therapeutic agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue, encouraging healing.
- the third element 1370 may be slidably interfaced to the first and second elements 1310 , 1340 such that the third element 1370 at least slides vertically with respect to the first and second elements 1310 , 1340 .
- the top portion 1371 may include one or more protrusions 1374 that may aide in holding the top surface 1371 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example. While only a few protrusions 1374 are identified, additional or less protrusions 1374 may be utilized.
- protrusion structures 1374 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form and may be applied to any embodiment described or contemplated herein.
- sidewalls 1316 , 1318 of element 1310 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and a bottom portion 1320 of base 1210 may include one or more protrusions 1321 .
- Protrusions 1321 may be, for example, similar to or different from protrusions 1374 , and may aide in holding a bottom portion 1320 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures.
- the base element 1310 may include a positioning structure or pin 1324 P which may be configured or adapted to move within a corresponding channel 1376 A to ensure that the element 1370 moves in a specific manner with respect to the base element 1310 .
- a void or space 1302 is defined by the first, second, and third elements 1310 , 1340 , 1370 of the intervertebral device 1300 , the void increasing in volume as the device 1300 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within the void 1302 .
- Such therapeutic agents may further flow out of the open space via additional openings, such as openings 1372 and 1322 , or other openings positioned about the elements 1310 , 1340 , 1370 .
- the third element 1370 of intervertebral device 1300 at least rotates with respect to the first and second elements 1310 , 1340 .
- the intervertebral device 1300 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second and third elements 1340 , 1370 , however the surfaces of the intervertebral device 1300 may include curvilinear portions to encourage at least rotational movement of the third element 130 with respect to the first and second elements 1310 , 1340 .
- Such curvilinear surfaces may be helical in nature, for example, to provide the desired rotation, which results in a desired angular relationship between the top surface 1371 of the third element 1370 and the bottom surface 1120 of the first element 1310 and a desired height, H 10 , when in an intermediate or expanded configuration.
- Such curvilinear surfaces may also allow for various portions of the third element 1370 to move at different rates with respect to the first and second elements 1310 , 1340 , for at least a portion of its operation.
- the curvilinear surfaces 1348 A contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1378 A of the third element 1370
- the curvilinear surface 1378 C may contact and slide along curvilinear surface 1348 C at a specific location, resulting in at least rotational movement of the element 1370 with respect to the first and second elements 1310 , 1340 .
- the amount of rotational movement can be defined by adjusting the geometry of surface 1378 C with respect to the geometry of surface 1378 A.
- surfaces 1348 A, 1348 B, 1378 A, 1378 B are described as being curvilinear surfaces, they may also include linear portions, depending on the overall desired movement to be achieved by the lifting element 1370 .
- the desired rotational movement of the intervertebral device 1300 results in curvilinear surfaces 1348 A, 1348 B being similar in geometric form, as is discussed in greater detail below with respect to FIGS. 47-50 .
- the top surface 1371 of the third or lifting element 1370 may be angled with respect to the bottom surface 1320 of the base element 1310 .
- the right lateral portion 1370 R of the lifting element 1370 which includes second corner portion 1371 C2 and third corner portion 1371 C3 , achieves a height H 10-2R in the expanded configuration
- the left lateral portion 1370 L of the lifting element 1370 which includes first corner portion 1371 C1 and fourth corner portion 1371 C4 , achieves a height H 10-2L .
- the top surface 1371 of the lifting element 1370 may define a geometric plane that forms an angle with respect to the planar surface 1320 of the base element 1310 , the angle represented by angle 1371 A. As is discussed below with respect to FIGS. 47-50 , this angle 1371 A may be defined such that a desired angle is achieved, with a corresponding desired height H 10 , when the intervertebral device 1300 is in its final configuration, which may be an intermediate configuration or its expanded configuration.
- the parameters of the intervertebral device 1300 may first be defined. Such defined parameters may include a height, H 10 , both when in a collapsed configuration and when in an expanded configuration, as well as the desired angular relationship between top surface 1371 of the third element 1370 and the bottom surface 1320 of the base element 1310 .
- the intervertebral device 1300 may be defined to have an initial collapsed configuration height, H 10-1 , of 7 mm, and an expanded configuration height, H 10-2R , of 12 mm, requiring a right lateral edge of the top surface including the second and third corner portions 1371 C2 , 1371 C4 , to expand 5 mm. That is, the expanded height, H 10-2R , less the initial height, H 10-1 , equals 5 mm.
- a desired exemplary angle of 10° lateral tilt e.g. defining an angle 1371 A of 10°
- the center of axis, Rc about which the right lateral edge rotates must first be determined.
- a circle or arc must exist where it's radius times the sin of 10 degrees equals this height differential, 5 mm. That radius is approximately 1.15 inches, and if the cage is 0.5 inches wide, then the center of that radius is 1.15 inches from the far lateral side 1316 and 0.65 inches from the near side 1318 of the intervertebral device 1300 .
- the center of the arc of rotation is collinear with the axis that the top plate rotates about.
- This axis does not have to be coplanar with the top surface 1371 of the third element 1370 , but can be positioned higher or lower than the top surface 1371 of the third element 1370 , as desired, to best facilitate it moving with the first and second elements 1310 , 1340 , while still lifting and rotating the desired amount.
- the distance the second or sliding element 1340 must be able to move distally must also be determined or defined. For example, we may desire for every 0.2 inches that the sliding element 1340 moves in the distal direction, the top plate will rotate 10 degrees, e.g., having its outer edge of the top surface 1371 elevated 0.2 inches. With specific reference to FIG. 49 , a circle, C, is drawn in a Right Plane with the center located on the axis of rotation, labeled Axis 1 .
- a helical curve is drawn, as shown, starting at the 3 o'clock position (or 9 o'clock, depending on from what side you are looking at the circle), extending and rotating at a rate of 10 degrees per 0.2 inches, and rotating for at least some distance, for example, for 90 degrees as shown.
- a rectangular pattern RP is provided starting at a surface of a plane, labeled Plane 1 , and transitioned along the helical path described above, forming a solid helical structure.
- a first side surface S 1 of this solid helical structure defines the curvilinear surface of the two proximal surfaces, e.g., 1348 A, 1348 C, of the sliding element 1340 , as generally depicted in FIG. 50 .
- the two proximal surfaces 1348 A, 1348 C of the sliding element 1340 are relatively coplanar, however, don't necessarily need to be represented by the first side S 1 of this one solid helical structure RP. Rather, each of the proximal surfaces 1348 A, 1348 C may be represented by any solid helical structural surface that has its axis of rotation at Axis 1 and has it's rotation to distance ratio at 10 degrees per 0.20 inches. All the curvilinear surfaces 1348 of the sliding element 1340 must share the same axis of rotation and rate of rotation, 10 degrees per 0.20 inches in this case.
- the mating curvilinear surfaces 1378 of the third element 1370 are simply the exact same curvilinear surfaces 1348 of the second element 1140 , however, are defined by a solid helical structure coming from the opposite side of curvilinear surfaces 1348 .
- the first element or base element 1310 may further include a plurality of engaging elements 1336 protruding from a top inner surface of the bottom portion 1320 of element 1310 .
- Second element 1340 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1350 , at least one of the elements 1350 engaging a respective one of the plurality of engaging elements 1336 of the base element 1310 . While depicted as being integral to the respective elements 1310 , 1340 , the engaging elements 1336 , 1350 may be individual parts attached or affixed to the surfaces of the base element 1310 and sliding element 1340 , respectively.
- the engaging elements 1336 , 1350 are depicted as having similar shapes, e.g., triangular portions, however in other configurations, the shapes can be dissimilar, or may be nonsymmetrical along its vertical central axis, passing through the tip of each element 1336 , 1350 .
- intervertebral device 1300 may include further include a plurality of pins 1345 coupled to sliding member 1340 .
- the pins 1345 may extend within grooves 1328 A on the inner walls of side portions 1316 , 1318 of base element 1310 , as best viewed in FIGS. 44 and 45 . These grooves may provide surfaces such that the pins behave similarly as if they extended through slots, as described above with respect to intervertebral device 700 .
- the sliding element 1340 is nearer the first end 1312 , the pins 1345 being nearer the first end 1312 , as well.
- the sliding element 1340 With the intervertebral device 1300 in the expanded configuration, as depicted in FIGS. 44 and 45 , the sliding element 1340 is nearer the distal end or second end 1314 , the pins 1345 being nearer the second end 1314 , as well.
- the grooves 1328 A of the first element 1310 may be spaced to allow some vertical travel of the sliding element 1340 and pins 1345 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of the engaging elements 1336 .
- each side surface of the engaging elements 1350 , 1336 may differ in accordance with the corresponding element 1350 , 1336 shaped surfaces.
- the geometric shape of each side surface of the engaging elements 1350 , 1336 which may be linear or curvilinear, or a combination thereof, may be configured to encourage movement of the sliding element 1340 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1310 with respect to movement of the sliding element 1340 in a second opposite direction.
- the engaging elements 1350 , 1336 are configured, e.g., with suitable shaped surfaces or the like, to become locked or immovable when a compression force exists between the third element 1370 and the base element 1310 .
- the engaging elements 1350 , 1336 continuously engage and disengage with adjacent opposing engaging elements 1350 , 1336 .
- the third element 1370 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H 10 , of the device 1100 .
- the engaging elements 1350 , 1336 of the sliding element 1340 and base element 1310 engage and prevent the sliding element 1340 from further translating.
- the sliding element 1340 of the intervertebral device 1300 may be translated through the use of a tool, such as expansion tool 860 described above for example, the distal portion of the sliding element 1340 including protrusions 1340 P and grooves 1340 G, similar to protrusions 740 P and grooves 740 G of intervertebral device 700 , for example.
- a tool such as expansion tool 860 described above for example, the distal portion of the sliding element 1340 including protrusions 1340 P and grooves 1340 G, similar to protrusions 740 P and grooves 740 G of intervertebral device 700 , for example.
- yet another exemplary intervertebral device 1400 includes a first or base element 1410 , a second or sliding element 1440 , and a third or lifting element 1470 .
- the intervertebral device 1400 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or disclosed herein, however the first, second and third elements 1410 , 1440 , 1470 cooperate such that the third element 1470 is adapted to rotate with respect to the other elements 1420 , 1440 during operation and along a longitudinal axis of the third element 1470 , a height of the distal portion 1414 of the device 1400 being less than a height of the proximal portion 1412 when the device 1400 is in an expanded configuration.
- the third element 1470 may include a top surface 1471 that may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1471 C1 , 1471 C2 , 1471 C3 , 1471 C4 , respectively, and 1471 C collectively.
- the second element 1440 and the third element 1470 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1470 C of the top surface 1471 move at one of a plurality of rates as the second element 1440 translates with respect to the third element 1470 . More specifically, the first corner portion 1471 C1 and second corner portion 1471 C2 may have a first rate, and the third corner portion 1471 C3 and forth corner portion 1471 C4 may have a second rate, the second rate being greater than the first rate.
- the third element 1470 may have a top planar surface 1471 that is angled with respect to a bottom planar surface 1420 of the base element 1410 , as better viewed in FIGS. 51B and 51C , when the interventional device 1400 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- the top surface 1471 of the third element 1470 may be initially angled with respect to a bottom surface 1420 of the base element 1410 when in a collapsed configuration, such that when the third element 1470 is at least elevated a portion, its top planar surface 1471 may form a desired angle with respect to the bottom planar surface 1420 of the base element 1410 .
- the intervertebral device 1400 includes a proximal end 1412 and a distal end 1414 , as well as a first lateral side 1416 and a second lateral side 1418 .
- the proximal end 1412 may include geometric structures 1430 G, 1430 P for positioning the intervertebral device 1400 , as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments.
- the first, second, and third elements 1410 , 1440 , 1470 further cooperate to provide an internal open space or void 1402 for deployment of therapeutic agents, as discussed herein.
- the intervertebral device 1400 is depicted in a collapsed configuration.
- the base element 1410 and the sliding element 1440 include various protrusions and grooves to allow for interfacing the device 1400 to a delivery system, such as delivery system 800 .
- a delivery system such as delivery system 800
- the elongated shaft 900 of the delivery system 800 may engage the sliding element 1340 and may engage groove 1430 G and protrusion 1430 P of the base element 1410 , both in accordance with the discussion above.
- the delivery system 800 may further include portions that interface with one or more recesses 1432 to fixedly hold the intervertebral device 1400 in contact with the delivery system 800 .
- FIG. 1 the intervertebral device 1400 is depicted in a collapsed configuration.
- the base element 1410 and the sliding element 1440 include various protrusions and grooves to allow for interfacing the device 1400 to a delivery system, such as delivery system 800 .
- the sliding or second element 1440 when the elongate shaft 900 is translated toward distal end 1414 of the intervertebral device 1400 , in a direction indicated by arrow 51 C A , the sliding or second element 1440 also translates in a distal direction. As the sliding element 1440 moves distally various curvilinear surfaces of the sliding element 1440 cooperate with corresponding various curvilinear surfaces of the lifting element 1470 such that the top surface 1471 moves in a rotationally vertical direction away from the base element 1410 , for example, as described in greater detail below.
- the intervertebral device 1400 since the intervertebral device 1400 includes a sloped top surface 1471 as compared to a bottom surface 1420 of the base 1410 , in a collapsed position the intervertebral device 1400 may have a first distal height H 11-1D and a first proximal height H 11-1P .
- the top surface may define an angle 1471 A 1 with respect to a longitudinal axis parallel to the bottom surface 1420 of the base 1410 .
- the sliding element 1430 In the collapsed configuration the sliding element 1430 is in its most proximal position.
- the sliding element 1430 has moved from its most proximal position to its most distal position, the third element 1470 rotating with respect to the base element 1410 such that the top surface 1471 has a second distal height H 11-2D and a second proximal height H 11-2P .
- the top surface 1471 of the third element 1470 forms a second angle 1471 A 2 with respect to a longitudinal axis parallel to the bottom surface 1420 of the base element 1410 .
- FIGS. 53A and 53B in which perspective views of the exemplary intervertebral device 1400 are depicted in cut view along section A-A of FIG. 51A , as with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, and discussed above, the elements 1410 , 1440 , 1470 cooperate such that the intervertebral device 1400 has a geometric height, Hi′, may have a minimum height, H 11-1 , in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 53A , and a maximum height, H 11_2 , in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted in FIG. 53B .
- the intervertebral device 1400 in a collapsed configuration has a first distal height H 11-1D and a first proximal height H 11-1P
- in an expanded configuration has a second distal height H 11-2D and a second proximal height H 11-2P .
- the first element 1410 also referred to as base 1410 or base element 1410 , may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for the intervertebral device 1400 , and includes a first end 1412 , a second end 1414 , and two side portions, a first side portion 1416 and an opposing side portion 1118 (as shown in FIGS. 51A-51C ).
- a bottom portion 1420 includes one or more openings 1422 , allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example.
- the second and third elements 1440 , 1470 may also include similar openings for the same or differing purposes.
- the proximal end 1412 may include an opening 1430 at the proximal end 1412 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking the intervertebral device 1400 in a specific configuration, for example.
- Such an opening 1430 may be similar, for example, to opening 1330 of the intervertebral device 1300 , as depicted in FIG. 46A .
- utilizing a single connecting point on the device 1400 for interfacing with a tool that can allow for other tools to be easily attached, tools for expanding, contracting or locking the device 1400 in a specific configuration, or tools for delivery of therapeutic materials provides for a more efficient system, allowing a user to more easily place, position, manipulate, and operate the device 1400 .
- the intervertebral device 1400 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H 11 , between a first collapsed heights H 11-1D , H 11-1P , as depicted in FIG. 53A , and second expanded heights H 11-2D and H 11-2P , as depicted in FIG. 53B .
- H 11 a first collapsed heights H 11-1D , H 11-1P , as depicted in FIG. 53A
- second expanded heights H 11-2D and H 11-2P as depicted in FIG. 53B .
- a distal portion of the third element 1470 may have a first expanded height H 11-2D and a proximal portion of the third element 1470 may have a second height H 8-2P .
- the intervertebral device 1400 may be expanded from a first position, having minimum distal height of H 11-1D and a minimum proximal height H 11-1P as depicted in FIG. 53A , to a second position, having a maximum distal height of H 11-2D and a maximum proximal height of H 11-2P as depicted in FIG. 28 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that corresponding position.
- the proximal end 1412 may also include structures, such as protrusions 1430 P and grooves 1430 G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect to delivery device 800 of FIG. 6 , for example, in a similar manner as intervertebral device 1100 , for example. In this way, such therapeutic agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue, encouraging healing.
- the tubular members to perform these functions may be the same tubular member or different tubular members.
- the third element 1470 may be slidably interfaced to the first and second elements 1410 , 1440 such that the third element 1470 at least slides vertically with respect to the first and second elements 1410 , 1440 , as well as rotationally.
- the third element 1470 may include one or more openings 1472 in the top portion or surface 1471 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough.
- the top portion 1471 may include one or more protrusions 1474 that may aide in holding the top portion 1471 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only a few protrusions 1474 are identified, additional or less protrusions 1474 may be utilized.
- protrusion structures 1474 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form. Additionally, sidewalls 1416 , 1418 of element 1410 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and a bottom portion or surface 1420 of base 1410 may include one or more protrusions 1421 . Protrusions 1421 may be, for example, similar to protrusions 1474 , which may aide in holding a bottom portion 1420 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example.
- the first element 1410 may include a positioning structure or protrusion 1424 , which may be configured or adapted to move within a corresponding channel 1476 of the third element 1470 to ensure the third element 1470 moves in a specific direction with respect to the base element 1410 .
- the protrusion 1424 and corresponding channel 1476 may be curvilinear to allow for rotation of the third element 1470 with respect to the second element 1440 as the second element 1440 translates.
- a void or space 1402 is defined by the first, second, and third elements 1410 , 1440 , 1470 of the intervertebral device 1400 , the void 1402 increasing as the device 1400 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within the void 1402 .
- such therapeutic agents may further flow out of the void 1402 via additional openings, such as openings 1472 and 1422 , positioned about the elements 1410 , 1440 , 1470 .
- the third element 1470 of intervertebral device 1400 at least rotates with respect to the first and second elements 1410 , 1440 .
- the intervertebral device 1400 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second and third elements 1440 , 1470 , however the surfaces of the intervertebral device 1400 may be curvilinear to encourage at least rotational movement of the third element 1470 with respect to the first and second elements 1410 , 1440 .
- Such curvilinear surfaces may allow for portions of the third element 1470 to move at different rates with respect to other portions thereof, while maintaining constant or near constant surface contact between the curvilinear surfaces of the third element 1470 and the second element 1440 .
- the third element 1470 may include a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1478 that are configured or adapted to come in contact along a respective one of a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1448 of second element 1440 .
- Curvilinear surfaces 1478 may include a first pair of curvilinear surfaces 1478 A and a second par of curvilinear surfaces 1478 B and these curvilinear surfaces may interface with corresponding curvilinear surfaces 1448 A, 1448 B of the second element 1440 , respectively.
- the curvilinear surfaces 1448 of the second element 1440 contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1478 of the third element 1470 resulting in movement of the element 1470 in at least a vertical direction.
- translation of sliding element 1440 from the first end 1412 toward the second end 1414 results in movement of the element 1470 in at least a vertical direction away from the base element 1410 , the third element 1470 rotating with respect to the first and second elements 1410 , 1440 .
- Translation of the sliding element 1440 in a direction from the second end 1414 toward the first end 1412 results in movement of the element 1470 in at least a vertical direction toward the base element 1410 , the third element 1470 once again rotating with respect to the first and second elements 1410 , 1440 , the top surface 1471 of the third element 1470 being substantially parallel with the bottom surface 1420 of the first element 1410 when the device 1400 returns to its collapsed configuration.
- Curvilinear surfaces 1448 A of the second element 1440 and curvilinear surfaces 1478 A of the third element 1470 may define a first circle having a radius R 1 (not shown), while curvilinear surface 1448 B of the second element and curvilinear surface 1478 B of the third element 1470 may define a second circle having a radius R 2 (not shown), which is greater than the radius R 1 .
- First and second circles are concentric allowing for all interfacing curvilinear surfaces to be in intimate contact during activation. As the second element 1440 moves distally, differences in radii R 1 and R 2 result in portions of the third element 1470 moving vertically at differing rates.
- corner portions 1470 C1 and 1470 C2 of the third element 1170 may move vertically at a slower rate than corner portions 1470 C3 and 1470 C4 of the third element 1470 , resulting in at least rotational movement of the third element 1470 with respect to the first and second elements 1410 , 1440 .
- a minimum height of the third element 1470 is H 11-1D and a maximum height of the third element 1470 is H 11-1P , the top surface 1471 of the third element 1470 forming an angle 1471 A 1 with respect to a bottom surface 1420 of the base element 1410 .
- a minimum height of the third element 1470 is H 11-2D and a maximum height of the third element 1470 is H 11-2P , the top surface 1471 of the third element 1470 forming an angle 1471 A 2 with respect to a bottom surface of the base element 1410 .
- the height H 11-2D and the height H 11-2P may range any suitable amount to provide for a desired angle 1471 A 2 .
- the radii R 1 and R 2 may be selected to provide for larger or smaller rates of rotation of the third element 1470 with respect to the first element 1410 .
- the first element or base element 1410 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1456 that protrude from a top inner surface of the bottom portion 1420 of element 1410 .
- Second element 1440 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1450 , at least one of the elements 1450 engaging a respective one of the plurality of engaging elements 1456 . While depicted as being integral to the respective elements 1410 , 1440 , the engaging elements 1436 , 1450 may be individual parts attached or affixed to the surfaces of the base element 1410 and sliding element 1440 , respectively.
- the engaging elements 1436 , 1450 are depicted as having similar shapes, e.g., triangular portions, however in other configurations, the shapes can be dissimilar, or may be nonsymmetrical along its vertical central axis, passing through the tip of each element 1436 , 1450 .
- the intervertebral device 1400 may be configured such that applying a linear force to the sliding element 1440 to translate the element 1440 between the first and second ends 1412 , 1414 of base member 1410 , results in each engaging element 1450 sliding up and over a corresponding engaging element 1436 , and engaging an adjacent engaging element 1436 in the direction of the movement of sliding element 1440 .
- sliding element 1440 while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of the base element 1410 , may also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of the engaging elements 1450 , 1456 of the sliding element 1440 and base element 1410 , respectively.
- the intervertebral device 1400 may further include a plurality of pins 1445 coupled to sliding member 1440 and extending through corresponding openings 1428 in the side portions 1416 , 1418 of base element 1410 , the openings 1428 may be similar to openings 728 of the intervertebral device 700 , as viewed in FIGS. 51A-53B . It is noted that by adjusting the slope or curvilinear shape of each side surface of the engaging elements 1450 , 1456 the translational force to move the sliding element 1440 in the presence of a compression force between the top surface 1471 of element 1470 and the bottom portion 1420 of the base element 1410 may differ in accordance with the corresponding element 1450 , 1456 shaped surfaces.
- each side surface of the engaging elements 1450 , 1456 which may be linear or curvilinear, or a combination thereof, may be configured to encourage movement of the sliding element 1440 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1410 with respect to movement of the sliding element 1440 in a second opposite direction.
- the engaging elements 1450 , 1436 are configured, e.g., with suitable shaped surfaces or the like, to become locked or immovable when a compression force exists between the third element 1470 and the base element 1410 .
- the sliding element 1440 may include a protrusion 1444 , similar to protrusion 1144 of the sliding element 1140 of intervertebral device 1100 , such protrusion being configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion or groove along the inner walls of side portions, respectively, of the third element 1470 .
- the engaging elements 1450 , 1456 continuously engage and disengage with adjacent opposing engaging elements 1450 , 1456 .
- the third element 1470 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H 11 , of the device 1400 .
- the engaging elements 1450 , 1456 of the sliding element 1440 and base element 1410 engage and prevent the sliding element 1440 from further translating.
- the sliding element 1440 of the intervertebral device 1400 may be translated through the use of a tool, such as exemplary tool 1000 described above for example, the distal portion of the sliding element 1440 including protrusions and grooves similar to protrusions 1140 P and grooves 1140 G, as best viewed in FIGS. 29 and 30 , to interface with the tool 1000 , for example.
- a tool such as exemplary tool 1000 described above for example, the distal portion of the sliding element 1440 including protrusions and grooves similar to protrusions 1140 P and grooves 1140 G, as best viewed in FIGS. 29 and 30 , to interface with the tool 1000 , for example.
- This disclosure provides exemplary embodiments that allow for the generation of a multitude of different intervertebral devices through determining the desired initial and final heights, and an angle of a top surface of the intervertebral device with respect to a bottom surface of said device.
- an intervertebral device may be provided that corresponds to any suitable access approach and patient anatomy.
- certain embodiments may have third elements that rotate about an axis that is substantially perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device, such as exemplary intervertebral device 1100 and exemplary intervertebral device 1400 .
- certain embodiments may have third elements that rotate about an axis that is substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device, such as exemplary intervertebral device 1300 .
- the rotational axis about which the third element rotates might not be parallel to nor perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device.
- such a rotational axis may form a 45-degree angle with a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device.
- FIGS. 54A-56B Such a device is discussed immediately below with respect to FIGS. 54A-56B .
- yet another exemplary intervertebral device 1500 includes a first or base element 1510 , a second or sliding element 1540 , and a third or lifting element 1570 .
- the intervertebral device 1500 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or disclosed herein, however the first, second and third elements 1510 , 1540 , 1570 cooperate such that the third element 1570 is adapted to rotate with respect to the other elements 1510 , 1540 during operation and along a rotational axis that is nether parallel to nor perpendicular to a longitudinal axis, L, of the intervertebral device 1500 .
- the third element 1570 may include a top surface 1571 that may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1571 C1 , 1571 C2 , 1571 C3 , 1571 C4 , respectively, and 1571 C collectively.
- the second element 1540 and the third element 1570 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1570 c of the top surface 1571 move at one of a plurality of rates as the second element 1540 translates with respect to the third element 1570 . More specifically, each of the first corner portion 1571 C1 , the second corner portion 1571 C2 , the third corner portion 1571 C3 , and the forth corner portion 1571 C4 may have a respective one of a plurality of rates.
- the third element 1570 may have a top planar surface 1571 that is angled with respect to a bottom planar surface 1520 of the base element 1510 as the interventional device 1500 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- the top surface 1571 of the third element 1570 may be initially angled with respect to a bottom surface 1520 of the base element 1510 when in a collapsed configuration, such that when the third element 1570 is elevated at least a portion, its top planar surface 1571 may form a desired angle with respect to the bottom planar surface 1520 of the base element 1510 .
- the intervertebral device 1500 includes a proximal end 1512 and a distal end 1514 , and the proximal end 1512 may include geometric structures 1530 G, 1530 P for positioning the intervertebral device 1500 , as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments.
- the first, second, and third elements 1510 , 1540 , 1570 further cooperate to provide an internal open space or void 1502 for deployment of therapeutic agents, as discussed herein.
- FIGS. 54B and 54C depict elevation side views of the intervertebral device 1500 as viewed from section line A, the section line A being perpendicular to the axis of rotation R C3 , in both a collapsed configuration ( FIG. 54B ) and an expanded configuration ( FIG. 54C ).
- the base element 1510 and the sliding element 1540 include various protrusions and grooves to allow for interfacing the device 1500 to a delivery system, such as delivery system 800 .
- the elongated shaft 900 of the delivery system 800 may engage a groove 1530 G and a protrusion 1530 P of the second element 1540 , in accordance with the discussion above with respect to groove 730 G and protrusion 730 P of the intervertebral device 700 .
- the delivery system 800 may further include portions that interface with one or more recesses 1532 to fixedly hold the intervertebral device 1500 in contact with the delivery system 800 . Accordingly, when the elongate shaft 900 is translated toward distal end 1514 of the intervertebral device 1500 , in a direction parallel to longitudinal axis L of the device 1500 for example, the sliding or second element 1540 also translates in a distal direction.
- the intervertebral device 1500 since the intervertebral device 1500 includes a sloped top surface 1571 as compared to a bottom surface 1520 of the base 1510 , in a collapsed position the intervertebral device 1500 may have a first distal height, for example near corner 1571 C2 , H 12-1D and a first proximal height, for example near corner 1571 C3 , H 12-1P . Note that these heights are for illustration purposes only and are defined relative to the specific elevation views of FIGS. 54B and 54C and, therefore, are not necessarily the distal most or proximal most portions of the device 1500 .
- the top surface 1571 may define an angle 1571 A 1 with respect to a line, R P , which is perpendicular to the axis of rotation, R C3 , and parallel to the bottom surface 1520 of the base 1510 .
- R P a line
- R C3 the axis of rotation
- the sliding element 1540 has moved from its most proximal position to its most distal position, the third element 1570 rotating with respect to the base element 1510 such that the top surface 1571 has a second distal height H 12-2D and a second proximal height H 12-2P .
- the top surface 1571 of the third element 1570 forms a second angle 1571 A 2 with respect to a line, R P , which is perpendicular to the axis of rotation, R C3 , and parallel to the bottom surface 1520 of the base 1510 .
- FIGS. 55A and 55B in which perspective views of the exemplary intervertebral device 1500 are depicted in cut view along section B-B of FIG. 54A , as with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, and discussed above, the elements 1510 , 1540 , 1570 cooperate such that the intervertebral device 1500 has a geometric height, H 12 .
- the height, H 12 of the intervertebral device 1500 and may have a minimum value in a collapsed configuration as depicted in FIG. 55A , generally referred to as a height H 12-1 , and may have a maximum value in an expanded configuration as depicted in FIG. 55B , generally referred to as height H 12-2 .
- the intervertebral device 1500 in a collapsed configuration has a first distal height H 12-1D and a first proximal height H 12-1P
- in an expanded configuration has a second distal height H 12-2D and a second proximal height H 12-2P .
- the first element 1510 may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for the intervertebral device 1500 , and includes a first end 1512 , and a second end 1514 .
- a bottom portion 1520 includes one or more openings 1522 (not shown), allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example.
- the second and third elements 1540 , 1570 may also include similar openings for the same or differing purposes.
- the proximal end 1512 may include an opening 1530 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking the intervertebral device 1500 in a specific configuration, for example.
- Such an opening 1530 may be similar, for example, to opening 1330 of the intervertebral device 1300 , as depicted in FIG. 46A .
- utilizing a single connecting point on the device 1500 for interfacing with a tool that can allow for other tools to be easily attached, tools for expanding, contracting or locking the device 1500 in a specific configuration, or tools for delivery of therapeutic materials provides for a more efficient system, allowing a user to more easily place, position, manipulate, and operate the device 1500 .
- the intervertebral device 1500 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H 12 , between a first collapsed heights H 12-1D , H 12-1P , as depicted in FIG. 55A , and second expanded heights H 12-2D and H 12-2P , as depicted in FIG. 55B .
- H 12 any suitable height
- first collapsed heights H 12-1D , H 12-1P as depicted in FIG. 55A
- second expanded heights H 12-2D and H 12-2P as depicted in FIG. 55B .
- a distal portion of the third element 1570 may have a first expanded height H 12-2D and a proximal portion of the third element 1570 may have a second height H 12-2P .
- the intervertebral device 1500 may be expanded from a first position, having minimum distal height of H 12-1D and a minimum proximal height H 12-1P as depicted in FIG. 55A , to a second position, having a maximum distal height of H 12-2D and a maximum proximal height of H 12-2P as depicted in FIG. 55B , or another position therebetween, and locked in that corresponding position.
- the height H 12 may range from about 12 mm to about 25 mm, and the angle may range from between about 0 degrees to about 20 degrees.
- the proximal end 1512 may also include structures, such as protrusions 1530 P and grooves 1530 G, best views in FIG. 54A , which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect to delivery device 800 of FIG. 6 , for example, in a similar manner as intervertebral device 1100 , for example. In this way, such therapeutic agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue, encouraging healing.
- the tubular members to perform these functions may be the same tubular member or different tubular members.
- the third element 1570 may be slidably interfaced to the first and second elements 1510 , 1540 such that the third element 1570 at least slides vertically with respect to the first and second elements 1510 , 1540 , as well as rotationally.
- the third element 1570 may include one or more openings 1572 in the top portion or surface 1571 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough.
- the top portion 1571 may include one or more protrusions 1574 that may aide in holding the top portion 1571 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only a few protrusions 1574 are identified, additional or less protrusions 1574 may be utilized.
- protrusion structures 1574 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form. Additionally, a bottom portion or surface 1520 of base 1510 may include one or more protrusions 1521 . Protrusions 1521 may be, for example, similar to protrusions 1574 , which may aide in holding a bottom portion 1520 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example.
- a void or space 1502 is defined by the first, second, and third elements 1510 , 1540 , 1570 of the intervertebral device 1500 , the void 1502 increasing as the device 1500 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration.
- one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within the void 1502 .
- such therapeutic agents may further flow out of the void 1502 via additional openings, such as openings 1572 and 1522 , positioned about the elements 1510 , 1540 , 1570 .
- the third element 1570 of intervertebral device 1500 at least rotates with respect to the first and second elements 1510 , 1540 .
- the intervertebral device 1500 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second and third elements 1540 , 1570 , however the surfaces of the intervertebral device 1500 may be curvilinear to encourage at least rotational movement of the third element 1570 with respect to the first and second elements 1510 , 1540 .
- Such curvilinear surfaces may allow for portions of the third element 1570 to move at different rates with respect to other portions thereof, while maintaining constant or near constant surface contact between the curvilinear surfaces of the third element 1570 and the second element 1540 .
- the third element 1570 may include a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1578 that are configured or adapted to come in contact along a respective one of a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1548 of second element 1540 .
- Curvilinear surfaces 1578 may include a first curvilinear surface 1578 A (not shown) and a second curvilinear surface 1578 B along a distal portion of the third element 1570 , and a third curvilinear surface 1578 C (not shown) and a forth curvilinear surface 1578 D along a proximal portion of the third element 1570 .
- curvilinear surfaces 1578 may interface with corresponding curvilinear surfaces 1548 A (not shown), 1548 B, 1548 C (not shown), and 1548 D of the second element 1540 , respectively. Accordingly, as the second element or sliding element 1540 translates between the first end 1512 and the second end 1514 of the base element 1510 , the curvilinear surfaces 1548 of the second element 1540 contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1578 of the third element 1570 resulting in movement of the third element 1570 in a rotationally vertical direction with respect to the base element 1510 and the sliding element 1540 .
- translation of sliding element 1540 from the first end 1512 toward the second end 1514 results in movement of the element 1570 in at least a vertical direction away from the base element 1510 , the third element 1570 rotating with respect to the first and second elements 1510 , 1540 .
- Translation of the sliding element 1540 in a direction from the second end 1514 toward the first end 1512 results in movement of the element 1570 in at least a vertical direction toward the base element 1510 , the third element 1570 once again rotating with respect to the first and second elements 1510 , 1540 , the top surface 1571 of the third element 1570 being substantially parallel with the bottom surface 1520 of the first element 1510 when the device 1500 returns to its collapsed configuration.
- FIGS. 56 through 60 the characteristics of curvilinear surfaces 1578 . 1548 of the intervertebral device 1500 will be discussed in greater detail.
- each of the FIGS. 56A, 57A, 58A, and 59A depict a portion 1540 A of the second element 1540 and a portion 1570 A of the third element 1570 in a first position
- FIGS. 56B, 57B, 58B, and 59B depict the portion 1570 A of the third element 1570 in a second position relative to the portion 1540 A of the second element 1540 , which maintains its first position for this discussion.
- FIGS. 56A and 56B depict a top view of a portion of the intervertebral device 1500 along its longitudinal axis, L;
- FIGS. 57A and 57B depict a front view of the portion of the intervertebral device 1500 along its longitudinal axis, L;
- FIGS. 58A and 58B depict a left side view of the portion of the intervertebral device 1500 along its longitudinal axis, L;
- FIGS. 59A and 59B depict an isometric view of the portion of the intervertebral device 1500 .
- the curvilinear surfaces 1578 , 1548 are perfectly coplanar with a cylindrical structure, C 1 , having an axis, Axis 1 , which is also the rotational axis about which the third element 1570 rotates.
- Axis 1 is approximately 45 degrees from the longitudinal axis, L, of the intervertebral device 1500 . Accordingly, as the portion of the third element 1570 moves relative to the second element 1540 , the third element merely rotates about Axis 1 while moving generally parallel to the longitudinal axis, L, of the intervertebral device 1500 , as shown in FIGS. 56B, 57B, 58B, and 59B .
- this movement is, first, rotating about Axis 1 and then, second, moving parallel to Axis 1 . This also perfectly mimics the outcome of the two parts if the bottom part moves along its longitudinal axis and the top part is held in place but free to rotate and translate upward.
- FIG. 60 initial location of the two portions 1570 A, 1540 A are depicted, with the final position is provided in outline view of the sides of the two portions after the portion 1540 A is moved and the top portion 1570 A is allowed to only rotate and translate upward, the final view of portion 1570 A being 1570 A F and the final view of portion 1540 A being 1540 F .
- a top surface of the portion 1570 A includes a planar surface P 1
- the top surface of the portion 1570 A F includes a planar surface P 2 .
- the circle, C 2 defines the intersection of the two planes P 1 and P 2 , an angle, A F , between the two planes P 1 and P 2 defining the angle between the top surface of the third element 1570 F in its final position and the top surface of the third element 1570 A. Because the two portions, 1570 A, 1540 A, move in continuous motion all positions in between the initial and final positions will be continuous.
- the angle between Axis 1 and the longitudinal axis, L, of the intervertebral device 1500 and the location of Axis 1 relative to the intervertebral device 1500 can all be varied to bring about a desired angle of rotation and location of rotation, e.g., C 2 of FIG. 60 , of the top part.
- the common surface between portions 1570 A, 1540 A can be a plurality of surfaces that are cylindrical and centered about the same axis, such as Axis 1 .
- the portion 1570 A, relative to the portion 1540 A can always be rotated about Axis 1 and moved in the direction parallel to the longitudinal axis, L.
- this movement can be described as, first, rotating about Axis 1 and then, second, moving parallel to Axis 1 , thus keeping all the common surfaces between the two parts in constant contact. This completely mimics the sliding element 1540 and third element 1570 on intervertebral device 1500 .
- the first element or base element 1510 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1536 that protrude from a top inner surface of the bottom portion 1520 of element 1510 .
- Second element 1540 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1550 , at least one of the elements 1550 engaging a respective one of the plurality of engaging elements 1536 . While depicted as being integral to the respective elements 1510 , 1540 , the engaging elements 1536 , 1550 may be individual parts attached or affixed to the surfaces of the base element 1510 and sliding element 1540 , respectively.
- the engaging elements 1536 , 1550 are depicted as having similar shapes, e.g., triangular portions, however in other configurations, the shapes can be dissimilar, or may be nonsymmetrical along its vertical central axis, passing through the tip of each element 1536 , 1550 .
- the intervertebral device 1500 may be configured such that applying a linear force to the sliding element 1540 to translate the element 1540 between the first and second ends 1512 , 1514 of base member 1510 , results in each engaging element 1550 sliding up and over a corresponding engaging element 1536 , and engaging an adjacent engaging element 1536 in the direction of the movement of sliding element 1540 .
- sliding element 1540 while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of the base element 1510 , may also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of the engaging elements 1550 , 1536 of the sliding element 1540 and base element 1510 , respectively.
- the intervertebral device 1500 may further include a plurality of pins 1545 coupled to sliding member 1540 and extending through corresponding openings 1528 in the side portions 1516 , 1518 of base element 1510 , the openings 1528 may be similar to openings 728 of the intervertebral device 700 .
- the intervertebral devices described herein may be made from any suitable biocompatible material, including but not limited to metals, metal alloys (e.g. stainless steel) and polymers (e.g. polycarbonate), and may be formed using any appropriate process, such as screw-machining or molding (e.g. injection molding).
- the intervertebral devices herein may be sized for minimally invasive procedures having operating lumens at about 14 mm or less.
- intervertebral devices described herein may be made from any suitable biocompatible material, including but not limited to metals, metal alloys (e.g. stainless steel) and polymers (e.g., polycarbonate), and may be formed using any appropriate process, such as screw-machining or molding (e.g., injection molding).
- the intervertebral devices herein may be sized for minimally invasive procedures having operating lumens at about 12 mm or less.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
- Neurology (AREA)
- Transplantation (AREA)
- Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
- Cardiology (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Vascular Medicine (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
- Prostheses (AREA)
- Surgical Instruments (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application claims benefit of priority to provisional application, Ser. No. 62/194,149, filed Jul. 17, 2015, and entitled, “Intervertebral Devices and Related Methods,” and is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- This disclosure relates generally to medical devices, and more particularly, to medical devices utilized for procedures performed on or near the spine.
- Degenerative disc diseases are common disorders that can impact all or a portion of a vertebral disc, a cushion-like structure located between the vertebral bodies of the spine. Degenerative disc diseases may lead, for example, to a disc herniation where the vertebral disc bulges out or extrudes beyond the usual margins of the disc and the spine. Disc herniation, in particular, is believed to be the result of excessive loading on the disc in combination with weakening of the annulus due to such factors as aging and genetics. Such degenerative disc diseases are also associated with spinal stenosis, a narrowing of the bony and ligamentous structures of the spine. Although disc herniation can occur anywhere along the perimeter of the disc, it occurs more frequently in the posterior and posterior-lateral regions of the disc, where the spinal cord and spinal nerve roots reside. Compression of these neural structures can lead to pain, parasthesias, weakness, urine and fecal incontinence and other neurological symptoms that can substantially impact basic daily activities and quality of life.
- Temporary relief of the pain associated with disc herniation, or other degenerative disc diseases, is often sought through conservative therapy, which includes positional therapy (e.g. sitting or bending forward to reduce pressure on the spine), physical therapy, and drug therapy to reduce pain and inflammation. When conservative therapy fails to resolve a patient's symptoms, surgery may be considered to treat the structural source of the symptoms. When surgery fails to resolve a patient's symptoms, more drastic measures may include disc replacement surgery or vertebral fusion.
- There are numerous implantable devices that have been developed for disc replacement and vertebral fusion. Such implantable devices, also referred to as cage systems, may be deployed to replace the vertebral disc and fuse the adjacent vertebrae, relieving pain and providing increased mobility to the patient. However, known implantable devices and methodologies have drawbacks. For example, many of the implantable devices currently available do not allow for an ample amount of materials, such as certain therapeutic agents that encourage bone growth, to be positioned within and around the devices and adjacent vertebral bones. Such bone growth materials allow for a higher level of fusion of the adjacent vertebrae, providing increased stabilization and minimize the likelihood of further issues in the future. Further, many implantable intervertebral devices require complex manipulation of delivery systems for implanting the device itself, and other systems for deployment of such therapeutic agents. Many of the implantable intervertebral devices available provide a single lifting activity or function. For example, they may be fixed in a certain geometric configuration, having a fixed height, or a fixed angular relationship between a top surface and a bottom surface of an intervertebral device, which limits the procedure available for positioning the device within a patient. Also, many implantable devices are large structures that are not easily utilized in a minimally invasive procedure. Rather, they may require surgical procedures allowing greater access, which subjects the patient to higher risks of disease and prolonged infection.
- There is a need for implantable devices intended for replacement of a vertebral disc, which allow for ample placement of bone growth material that may lead to better fusion between adjacent vertebral bones. There is a further need for implantable intervertebral devices that include delivery systems that provide increased functionality, such delivery systems utilized for deployment of the intervertebral device within a patient as well as therapeutic agents to encourage bone growth and healing. There is also a need for an intervertebral device that is configured to include a top planar surface that is further adapted to include portions that move at one of a plurality of rates as the intervertebral device is expanded, such that the top planar surface forms a desired complex angle with respect to the bottom planar surface as the intervertebral device is expanded. Accordingly, the intervertebral device may be adapted to correspond to any suitable approach to the spine, including but not limited to, anterior lumbar interbody fusion (ALIF) access where the vertebral disc is accessed from an anterior abdominal incision; posterior lumbar interbody fusion (PLIF) access where the vertebral disc is accessed from a posterior incision; transforaminal lumbar interbody fusion (TLIF) access where the disc is accessed from a posterior incision on one side of the spine; transpsoas interbody fusion (DLIF or XLIF) access where the disc is accessed from an incision through the psoas muscle on one side of the spine; oblique (posterior) lumbar interbody fusion (OLLIF) access where the disc is accessed from an incision through the psoas muscle obliquely; or any other desired access. There is still a further need for such implantable devices to be provided during minimally invasive procedures, reducing the risk of infection and allowing for quicker healing of the patient.
- Consistent with the present disclosure, an expandable intervertebral device may comprise a base element, a first body portion slidably attached to the base and configured to move in at least a first direction with respect to the base, the first body portion including a first plurality of curvilinear surfaces, a second body portion slidably attached to the base and configured to move in at least a second direction with respect to the base, the second body portion including a second plurality of curvilinear surfaces, each of the first plurality of curvilinear surfaces configured to couple with a respective one of the second plurality of curvilinear surfaces, such that the second body portion at least rotates with respect to the base as the first body portion moves in the first direction. In certain embodiments the first body portion may include a first engaging element and the second body portion may include a second engaging element, the second engaging element configured to couple to the first engaging element. In other embodiments the first and second engaging elements are configured such that the coupling of the first and second engaging elements prevents movement of the second body portion in a third direction with respect to the base when a compression force is applied between the top surface of the second body portion and the bottom surface of the base. In yet other embodiments the third direction may be substantially opposite to the second direction.
- In certain embodiments the device may include a longitudinal access and the second body portion may include an axis of rotation, the axis of rotation of the second body portion being parallel to the longitudinal axis of the device. While in other embodiments the device may include a longitudinal access and the second body portion may include an axis of rotation, the axis of rotation of the second body portion being perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the device. In still other embodiments the device may include a longitudinal access and the second body portion may include an axis of rotation, the axis of rotation of the second body portion neither being perpendicular nor parallel to the longitudinal axis of the device.
- In still other embodiments each of a first pair of the first curvilinear surfaces of the first body portion are similar, while in other embodiments each of a second pair of the first curvilinear surfaces of the first body portion are similar, the second pair being different from the first pair, and in yet other embodiments each of the first plurality of curvilinear surfaces are different.
- In other embodiments the device includes a delivery system, which may have an attachment assembly including a lumen therethrough, the attachment assembly may be configured to removably attach to the base element and position the device. In still other embodiments the delivery system may further include an expansion tool having an elongate shaft, a distal end of the elongate shaft may be configured to pass through the lumen of the attachment assembly and removably attach to the first body portion, the expansion tool being configured to translate the elongate shaft and the first body portion attached thereto. In yet other embodiments the delivery system may further include an insertion assembly having an elongate member, the elongate member of the insertion assembly may be slidably coupled to the lumen of the attachment tool, a distal end of the elongate member configured to translate through the lumen of the attachment tool.
- In certain other embodiments the base, first body portion, and second body portion may be configured to define a void central to the base, first body portion and second body portion, the distal end of the elongate member configured to translate within the void. In certain embodiments a central longitudinal axis of the base, first body portion, and second body portion passes through the void.
- In other embodiments the second body portion includes a top surface having a first corner portion, a second corner portion, a third corner portion and a fourth corner portion, each of the first corner portion, second corner portion, third corner portion, and fourth corner portion moving at a corresponding one of a plurality of rates as the second body portion moves in the second direction, the plurality of rates being selected such that the top surface forms an angle with respect to the bottom surface as the second body portion moves in the second direction. In yet other embodiments the rate of one of the first corner portion and the second corner portion is the same as the rate of one of the third corner portion and the fourth corner portion, while in other embodiments each of the plurality of rates are different, such that the top surface of the second body portion forms a complex angle with respect to the bottom surface of the base.
- In another aspect. a method includes providing an intervertebral device having a height and a delivery system, the delivery system including an attachment assembly having a lumen, an expansion tool having a shaft, and an insertion tool having an elongate member, attaching the intervertebral device to a distal end of the attachment assembly and positioning the intervertebral device between adjacent vertebrae, inserting the expansion tool within the lumen of the attachment assembly, a distal end of the expansion tool removably attaching to the intervertebral device, and translating the expanding tool resulting in a change in the height of the intervertebral device. In other embodiments the method may further include detaching the expansion tool from the intervertebral device and removing the expansion tool from the lumen of the delivery system, positioning a therapeutic agent within the lumen of the attachment assembly, translating the elongate member of the insertion tool within the lumen of the attachment assembly, translation of the elongate member resulting in translation of the therapeutic agent, such that a portion of the therapeutic agent is positioned within the intervertebral device. In yet other embodiments the insertion tool further may include a guide assembly having a tubular member, the step of positioning the therapeutic agent may include positioning the therapeutic agent within the lumen of the tubular member of the guide assembly, and the step of translating the elongate member of the insertion tool may include the step of translating the tubular member of the guide assembly within the lumen of the attachment assembly.
- Reference will be made to embodiments of the disclosure, examples of which may be illustrated in the accompanying figures. These figures are intended to be illustrative, not limiting. Although certain aspects of the embodiments are generally described in the context of these embodiments, it should be understood that it is not intended to limit the scope to these particular embodiments. In the drawings:
-
FIG. 1 is a top view of an exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIG. 2 is a perspective partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 3 is another perspective partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 4 is a side partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 5 is another side partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 6 is a perspective view of an exemplary delivery device. -
FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a portion of the exemplary delivery device ofFIG. 6 . -
FIG. 8 is a top view of an element of the portion of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 7 . -
FIG. 9 is a partial section view of the element depicted inFIG. 8 . -
FIG. 10 is another top view of the element of the portion of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 7 . -
FIG. 11 is another partial section view of the element depicted inFIG. 8 . -
FIGS. 12A-C are perspective views of certain elements of the portion of the exemplary delivery device ofFIG. 7 . -
FIG. 13 is a partial section view of a portion of the exemplary delivery device ofFIG. 6 . -
FIG. 14 is a perspective view of an expansion tool of the exemplary delivery device ofFIG. 6 . -
FIGS. 15A-15B are partial section views of portions of the delivery device ofFIG. 6 . -
FIGS. 16A-46B are perspective views of a portion of the elementFIG. 14 , the portion engaging an element of an exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIG. 17 is a partial cut view of a portion of the element ofFIG. 14 . -
FIG. 18 is a partial section view of a portion of the element ofFIG. 14 . -
FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a guide assembly, as part of a delivery tool. -
FIG. 20 is a perspective view of an insertion assembly, as part of a delivery tool. -
FIG. 21 is a partial section view of a portion of the insertion assembly ofFIG. 20 . -
FIG. 22 is another partial section view of a portion of the insertion assembly ofFIG. 20 . -
FIG. 23A is a perspective view of the guide assembly ofFIG. 19 , coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly. -
FIG. 23B is a perspective view of the guide assembly ofFIG. 19 and the insertion assembly ofFIG. 20 coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly. -
FIG. 24A is another perspective view of the guide assembly ofFIG. 19 and the insertion assembly ofFIG. 20 coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly. -
FIG. 24B is a partial section view of a distal portion of a delivery system. -
FIG. 25A is a partial section view of the guide assembly ofFIG. 19 and the insertion assembly ofFIG. 20 coupled to an exemplary attachment assembly. -
FIG. 25B is another partial section view of a distal portion of a delivery system. -
FIG. 26 is a top view of another exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIG. 27 is a partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 26 . -
FIG. 28 is another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 26 . -
FIG. 29 is a yet another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 26 . -
FIG. 30 is still another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 26 . -
FIGS. 31A and 31B are end views of another exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIGS. 32A and 32B are additional end views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIGS. 31A and 31B , respectively. -
FIG. 33A is a lateral view of an exemplary placement of an intervertebral device. -
FIG. 33B is a top view of an exemplary placement of an intervertebral device. -
FIG. 34 is a top view of yet another exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIG. 35 is a partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 34 . -
FIG. 36 is another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 34 . -
FIG. 37 is yet another partial section view of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 34 . -
FIG. 38 is a side elevation cut view of the intervertebral device ofFIG. 34 . -
FIG. 39 is another side elevation cut view of the intervertebral device ofFIG. 34 . -
FIG. 40 is still another side elevation cut view of the intervertebral device ofFIG. 34 . -
FIG. 41A is a top view of another exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIGS. 41B and 41C are perspective views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIGS. 42 and 43 are side elevation cut views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIGS. 44 and 45 are additional side elevation cut views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIGS. 46A and 46B are end elevation views of the intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIG. 47 is a graph depicting certain geometric properties of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIG. 48 is a side elevation cut view of an element of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIG. 49 is another graph depicting certain geometric properties of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIG. 50 is yet another graph depicting certain geometric properties of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 41A . -
FIG. 51A is a top view of yet another exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIGS. 51B-51C are prospective views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 51A . -
FIGS. 52A-52B are side elevation views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 51A . -
FIGS. 53A-53B are side section views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 51A . -
FIG. 54A is a top view of another exemplary intervertebral device. -
FIGS. 54B and 54C are side elevation views of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 54A . -
FIGS. 55A and 55B are partial section views along a first longitudinal axis of the exemplary intervertebral device ofFIG. 54A . -
FIGS. 56A-60 are graphical views of portions of the intervertebral device ofFIG. 54A . - Intervertebral devices and systems, and methods of their use, are disclosed having configurations suitable for placement between two adjacent vertebrae, replacing the functionality of the disc therebetween. Intervertebral devices and systems contemplated herein are implantable devices intended for replacement of a vertebral disc, which may have deteriorated due to disease for example. The intervertebral devices and systems disclosed or contemplated herein are configured to allow for ample placement of therapeutic agents therein, including bone growth enhancement material, which may lead to better fusion between adjacent vertebral bones. The delivery systems described herein provide increased functionality, such delivery systems utilized for deployment of an intervertebral device within a patient as well as deployment of therapeutic agents to encourage bone growth and healing, such systems being less complex. Also, such intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein are configured to include a top planar surface that is further adapted to include portions that move at one of a plurality of rates as the intervertebral device is expanded, such that the top planar surface forms a desired complex angle with respect to the bottom planar surface as the intervertebral device is expanded. The top planar surface, or element thereof, may be configured to rotate about a rotational axis to achieve the desired complex angle. Certain intervertebral devices may be configured such that the top planar surface rotates about a rotational axis that is perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device. Alternatively, other intervertebral devices may be configured such that the top planar surface rotates about a rotational axis that is parallel to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device. Additionally, still other intervertebral devices may be configured such that the tope planar surface rotates about a rotational axis that is neither perpendicular nor parallel to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device. The intervertebral devices and systems may be configured for use in minimally invasive procedures, if desired. Accordingly, the intervertebral device may be adapted to correspond to any suitable approach to the spine described or contemplated herein.
- The following description is set forth for the purpose of explanation in order to provide an understanding of the various embodiments of the present disclosure. However, it is apparent that one skilled in the art will recognize that embodiments of the present disclosure may be incorporated into a number of different systems and devices.
- The embodiments of the present disclosure may include certain aspects each of which may be present in one or more medical devices or systems thereof. Structures and devices shown below in cross-section or in block diagram are not necessarily to scale and are illustrative of exemplary embodiments. Furthermore, the illustrated exemplary embodiments disclosed or contemplated herein may include more or less structures than depicted and are not intended to be limited to the specific depicted structures. While various portions of the present disclosure are described relative to specific structures or processes with respect to a medical device or system using specific labels, such as “locked” or “therapeutic agents”, these labels are not meant to be limiting.
- The expandable intervertebral devices described herein may be made from any suitable biocompatible material, including but not limited to metals, metal alloys (e.g. stainless steel) and polymers (e.g. polycarbonate), and may be formed using any appropriate process, such as screw-machining or molding (e.g. injection molding). The intervertebral devices herein may be sized for minimally invasive procedures having operating lumens at about 12 mm or less. For illustration purposes only, any expandable intervertebral device described or contemplated herein may have a height in the range from about 6 mm to about 16 mm, and a length in the range of from about 20 to about 40 mm, and a width in the range of from about 8 mm to about 16 mm. The intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein may be positioned between adjacent vertebrae through any suitable procedure, such as through a posterior lumbar interbody approach or through a transforaminal lumbar interbody approach, for example. Each of the intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein may have a collapsed configuration and an expanded configuration. The intervertebral devices may include a top planar surface and a bottom planar surface, such that when in the collapsed configuration the top planar surface and the bottom planar surface define a first angular relationship and when in the expanded configuration the top planar surface and the bottom planar surface may define a second angular relationship. As the intervertebral device transitions between the collapsed configuration and the expanded configuration, the top planar surface and the bottom planar surface may define one of a plurality of angular relationships. The second angular relationship may be
- The various intervertebral device embodiments described or contemplated herein may include first, second, and third elements. The first element may also be referred to as a base element. The second element may also be referred to as a sliding element or a first body portion. The third element may also be referred to as a lifting element or a second body portion.
- Reference will now be made in detail to the present exemplary embodiments, which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings.
- Turning to
FIG. 1 , an exemplaryintervertebral device 700 includes a first orbase element 710, a second element or slidingelement 740, and a third element or liftingelement 770. The second or slidingelement 740 may also be referred to as afirst body portion 740, and thethird element 770 may also be referred to as asecond body portion 770. Turning also toFIGS. 2 and 3 , in which perspective views of the exemplaryintervertebral device 700 is depicted in cut view along section A-A ofFIG. 1 . As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein and as better understood in light of the discussion below, theelements intervertebral device 700 geometric height, H7, may have a minimum, collapsed configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 2 , and a maximum, expanded configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 3 . - The
first element 710, also referred to asbase 710, orbase element 710, is configured to provide a base or outer structure for theintervertebral device 700, and includes a first orproximal end 712, and a second ordistal end 714, and two side portions, afirst side portion 716 and an opposingside portion 718. Abottom portion 720 may include one ormore openings 722 allowing for therapeutic agents to pass therethrough. It should be readily understood that the second andthird elements proximal end 712, may include anopening 730 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or for expanding, contracting, or locking theintervertebral device 700 in a specific configuration, as discussed below in greater detail with respect todelivery system 800. - The
intervertebral device 700 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H7, between a first collapsed height H7-1 and a second expanded height H7-2, with reference toFIGS. 2 and 3 , respectively. For example, theintervertebral device 700 may be expanded from a first position, having the height of H7-1 inFIG. 2 , to a second position, having the height of H7-2 inFIG. 3 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that position. Theproximal end 712 may also include structures, such asprotrusions 730P andgrooves 730G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described below with respect todelivery system 800 ofFIG. 8 . Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning theintervertebral device 700, for example between two adjacent vertebrae, within a patient. As described in greater detail below, thedelivery system 800 may include tubular members through which therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within theintervertebral device 700, and exiting through the one ormore openings 722 of theelement 710, or similar openings of the remainingelements - The
third element 770 is slidably interfaced to thefirst element 710 such that thethird element 770 at least slides vertically with respect to thefirst element 710. Thethird element 770 may include one ormore openings 772 in a top portion orsurface 771 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough. Thetop portion 771 may include one ormore protrusions 774 that may aide in holding thetop portion 771 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only afew protrusions 774 are identified, additional orless protrusions 774 may be utilized. As with the elements themselves 710, 740, 770,such protrusion structures 774 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form and may be applied to any embodiment described or contemplated herein. Additionally, sidewalls 716, 718 ofelement 710 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and abottom portion 720 ofbase 710 may include one ormore protrusions 721.Protrusions 721 may, for example, may be similar toprotrusions 774, which may aide in holding abottom portion 720 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. - Turning specifically to
FIG. 1 , theelement 710 may include a pair of positioning structures orprotrusions 724, which may be configured or adapted to move within one of a pair ofcorresponding channels 776 of thethird element 770, to ensure that theelement 770 moves in a specific direction with respect to theelement 710. Accordingly, thechannel 776 and associatedprotrusion 724 may be configured to form any desirable angle with respect to a longitudinal axis ofelement 710. As depicted, thechannel 776 ofelement 770 is substantially perpendicular to a longitudinal axis ofelement 710 and, therefore, theelement 770 moves in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis ofelement 710. - Turning back to
FIGS. 1-3 , a void orspace 702 is defined by the first, second, andthird elements intervertebral device 700, the void 702 increasing as thedevice 700 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. In this way, once thedevice 700 is deployed therapeutic agents may be positioned within the void 702 from thefirst end 712 to thesecond end 714. Such agents may further flow out of the open space via additional openings, such asopenings elements - The
third element 770 may include a plurality of slopedsurfaces 778 that are configured or adapted to contact a respective one of a plurality of slopedsurfaces 748 ofsecond element 740. Accordingly, as the second element or slidingelement 740 translates between thefirst end 712 and thesecond end 714 of thebase element 710, thesloped surfaces 748 contact and slide along corresponding respective slopedsurfaces 778 of thethird element 770 resulting in movement of thethird element 770 in a vertical direction, e.g. defined by channels and wall structures between thefirst element 710 and thethird element 770. Additionally, the movement may be controlled by the sloped surfaces themselves, as discussed below with respect tointervertebral device 1100, among others. As depicted, translation of slidingelement 740 from thefirst end 712 toward thesecond end 714 results in movement of theelement 770 in a vertical direction away from thebase element 710. Translation of the slidingelement 740 in a direction from thesecond end 714 toward thefirst end 712 results in movement of theelement 740 in a vertical direction toward thebase element 710. As should be readily understood, thesloped surfaces intervertebral device 700 increases in height as the slidingelement 740 transitions from a distal position to a more proximal position. - The first element or
base element 710 may further include a plurality ofengaging elements 736 protruding from a top inner surface of thebottom portion 720 ofelement 710.Second element 740 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 750, at least one of theelements 750 engaging a respective one of the plurality ofengaging elements 736 of thebase element 710. While depicted as being integral to therespective elements engaging elements base element 710 and slidingelement 740, respectively. Theengaging elements element - The
intervertebral device 700 is configured such that applying a linear or axial force to the slidingelement 740 to translate theelement 740 between the first and second ends 712, 714 ofbase member 710, results in eachengaging element 750 sliding up and over a correspondingengaging element 736, and engaging an adjacentengaging element 736 in the direction of the movement of slidingelement 740. Accordingly, slidingelement 740, while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of thebase element 710, also moves vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of theengaging elements element 740 andbase element 710, respectively. As depicted, theengaging elements intervertebral device 700 to better allow for free movement of thevarious elements - The
intervertebral device 700 may include a plurality ofpins 745 coupled to slidingmember 740 and extending through correspondingopenings 728 in theside portions base element 710. With theintervertebral device 700 in the collapsed configuration, as depicted inFIG. 2 , the slidingelement 740 is nearer thefirst end 712, thepins 745 being nearer thefirst end 712, as well. With theintervertebral device 700 in the expanded configuration, as depicted inFIG. 3 , the slidingelement 740 is nearer the distal end orsecond end 714, thepins 745 being nearer thesecond end 714, as well. Theopenings 728 of thefirst element 710 are spaced to allow some vertical travel of the slidingelement 740 and pins 745 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of theengaging elements engaging elements element 740 in the presence of a compression force between thetop portion 771 ofelement 770 and thebottom portion 720 of thebase element 710 may differ in accordance with thecorresponding element engaging elements element 740 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 710 with respect to the slidingelement 740 in a second opposite direction. In any case, theengaging elements third element 770 and thebase element 710. - Turning specifically to
FIG. 3 , the slidingelement 740 may include aprotrusion 744 configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion orgroove 736A along the inner wall of thethird element 770. Theprotrusion 744 cooperates with recessedportion 736A such that when the slidingelement 740 translates in a proximal direction, in a direction towardproximal end 712 of the intervertebral device for example, the surfaces of theprotrusion 744 may engage surfaces of the recessedportion 736A to encourage thethird element 770 to move vertically toward thefirst element 710. - In the presence of a linear force applied to sliding
element 740 moving theelement 740 towardend 714, in a ratcheting manner, for example, theengaging elements engaging elements element 740 translates, thethird element 770 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H7, of thedevice 700. With a compression force applied between thethird element 770 and thebase element 710, e.g. when thedevice 700 is positioned between adjacent tissue surfaces, such as two adjacent vertebrae, theengaging elements element 740 andbase element 710, respectively, engage and prevent the slidingelement 740 from further translating. For illustration purposes only, the slidingelement 740 of theintervertebral device 700 may be translated through the use of a tool, such asexemplary delivery system 800 described below, theprotrusion 730P andgroove 730G of thebase element 710 adapted to interface with thedelivery system 800, for example. - Turning to
FIGS. 4 and 5 , theintervertebral device 700 is depicted in elevation cut view along section B-B, a longitudinal centerline, ofFIG. 1 . Theintervertebral device 700 is depicted in a collapsed configuration inFIG. 4 and an expanded configuration inFIG. 5 . In particular, the slidingelement 740 includes aretention device 760 to aide in maintaining contact between theengaging element element 740 andbase element 710, respectively. Theretention device 760 includes apin 745A and aspring 747, thespring 747 seated in acorresponding bore 746. As depicted, thepin 745A may extend from a first opening 723 inside portion 716 to a second opening 723 in side portion 718 (not shown). Thepin 745A includes aprotrusion 762 that extends from a central longitudinal axis of thepin 745A toward thebottom 720 of thefirst element 710. In operation, as the slidingelement 740 translates between the two ends 712, 714, theengaging elements element 740 repeatedly moving vertically away from and toward to thebottom portion 720 of thebase element 710. As the slidingelement 740 moves away from thebase element 710 the ends of thepin 745A engage the top surfaces of the corresponding openings 723 inrespective side portions spring 747. As theengaging elements 750 of the slidingelement 740 pass over the correspondingengaging elements 736 of thebase element 710 the spring imparts a force upon the slidingelement 740 to encourage re-engagement of the adjacentengaging elements engaging elements 750 are biased to remain coupled to correspondingengaging elements 736 during each movement of the slidingelement 740, particularly in a no-load situation, where the force between thethird element 770 and thefirst element 710 is minimal, for example. Accordingly, when a compression force is applied between thetop surface 771 of thethird element 770 and thebottom surface 720 of thebase element 710, engagingelements elements intervertebral device 700. - Turning to
FIG. 6 , adelivery system 800 for positioning and operatingintervertebral device 700, or other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, includes anattachment assembly 810 and anexpansion tool 860. Theattachment assembly 810 is utilized for attaching an intervertebral device, such asintervertebral device 700, to thedelivery system 800. Theexpansion tool 860 is utilized for setting a height of theintervertebral device 700 once thedevice 700 has been deployed, between adjacent vertebrae for example. Turning toFIG. 7 , theattachment assembly 810 may include aninterface unit 812, acontrol assembly 820, agrasper unit 840, and anelongate member 814 that extends from thecontrol assembly 820 to thegrasper unit 840. Theinterface unit 812 is configured to attach theattachment assembly 810 to theexpansion tool 860, as is discussed in greater detail below. Theelongate member 814 may be of any suitable length to allow for placement of an intervertebral device at a desired location within a patient, while allowing for control from a point external to the patient. Theelongate member 814 may include one or more lumens or members therein for controlling thegrasper unit 840 or theintervertebral device 700, or for transmission of therapeutic agents to a corresponding void within the intervertebral device, such asvoid 702 of thedevice 700. - Turning to
FIGS. 8-11 , operation of thegrasper unit 840 will be described in greater detail. Thegrasper unit 840 includes ahousing 842 having first and second pairs of slots 842AS1, 842AS2, 842BS1, 842BS2, and acontrol ring 844 operational coupled to first andsecond arms elongate member 814 may be fixedly coupled to thehousing 842 viapins 815, for example. Anelongate member 816 passes through a lumen of theelongate member 814, and includes a threadedportion 816T that is rotationally coupled to threadedportion 844T of thecontrol ring 844. Rotational movement of theelongate member 816 is transformed into axial movement of thecontrol ring 844 through treadedportions First arm 846A includes first andsecond protrusions third protrusion 846AP3 at a distal tip of thearm 846A. Similarly,second arm 846B includes first andsecond protrusions third protrusion 846BP3 at a distal tip of thearm 846B. With momentary reference toFIG. 7 , slots 842BS1, 842BS2 are depicted as part of thegrasper unit 840. Slots 842AS1, 842AS2 are similar to slots 842BS1, 842BS2, respectively, and are located on the opposite side ofgrasper unit 840. As depicted inFIG. 8 ,arm 846A includes a raisedportion 848A configured to engage a surface ofhousing 842. More specifically, the raisedportion 848A includes asurface 848AS configured to engage a surface 843AS of the housing. In similar fashion,arm 846B includes a raisedportion 848B having asurface 848AS configured to engage a surface 843AS of thehousing 842. Accordingly, as thehousing 842 moves distally relative to thearms protrusions -
FIGS. 8 and 9 depict thearms FIGS. 10 and 11 depict thearms arms elongate member 816 in a first direction results in axial movement of thecontrol ring 844 as indicated byarrow 844A. Since thecontrol ring 844 is coupled to thearms surfaces housing 842 to move the arms apart from each other, e.g., transitioning to a closed configuration for example. Continued axial movement of the control ring results in moving thearms elongate member 816 in a second direction opposite to the first direction, results in axial movement of thecontrol ring 844 in a direction opposite to that indicated byarrow 844A. As thecontrol ring 844 moves distally with respect tohousing 842, as well asarms protrusions arms housing 842, the more thedistal protrusions intervertebral device 700. While actuation of thearms slots 842 other methodologies may be used. For example, the housing may include pins that travel in slots within thearms arms arms - Turning to
FIGS. 12A-12C , the interaction between thecontrol ring 844,arms elongate member 816 is depicted. Thecontrol ring 844 includes first and second “T”slots 845, each coupled to a proximal end of one of thearms FIG. 12B . The coupling point between theslots 845 and thearms distal protrusions arms intervertebral device 700.FIG. 12C depicts thecontrol ring 844 rotatably coupled to theelongate tube 816. - Turning to
FIG. 13 , theinterface unit 812 is fixedly attached to thecontrol assembly 820, and thecontrol assembly 820 is fixedly attached to elongatemember 814. Thecontrol assembly 820 includes arotatable control 824, aclutch assembly 826, and aspring 828. Therotatable control 824 is rotationally attached to aclutch member 826A, as part of aclutch assembly 826. Aclutch member 826B is fixedly attached to elongatemember 816. Thespring 828 provides a force to encourage coupling betweenclutch member 826A andclutch member 826B atfingers 826F. Thefingers 826F are configured such that rotation of therotatable control 824 in a first direction results in constant engagement of the fingers, and rotation of therotatable control 824 in a second direction opposite to the first direction results in the fingers ofclutch member 826A slipping past the fingers ofclutch member 826B once the rotational torque becomes greater than the force applied by thespring 828 on theclutch member 826A. In this way, rotation of therotatable control 824 in the second direction results in thearms intervertebral device 700, without over-tightening the connection which may result in undue stress in thedelivery system 800 or theintervertebral device 700, or both. It should be understood that the interface of thefingers 826F may be adapted to provide a desired rotational torque such that the fingers of theclutch members - Turning to
FIG. 14 , theexpansion tool 860 includes a handle or handleportion 862 and anelongate shaft 900 rotatably coupled to thehandle 862. Theexpansion tool 860 is utilized for moving the second element, for example thesecond element 740 of theintervertebral device 700, along a longitudinal axis of thefirst element 710 to set a height of theintervertebral device 700 once thedevice 700 has been deployed, between adjacent vertebrae for example. - Turning to
FIGS. 15A and 15B ,handle portion 862 is depicted in section view and includes aninterface assembly 870 and anattachment control 880. Theinterface assembly 870 is configured to attach or interface thehandle portion 862 with theattachment assembly 810. More specifically, theinterface assembly 870 interfaces with theinterface element 812 of theattachment assembly 810. Theinterface assembly 870 includes apushbutton 872 in a slottedportion 873 of thehandle 862. Thepushbutton 872 is biased by aspring 874, which is positioned within abore 864 of thehandle 862. With specific reference toFIG. 15A , when thepushbutton 872 is depressed, compressing thespring 874, theinterface element 812 of theattachment assembly 810 may be positioned within anopening 866 within thehandle 862. Theinterface element 812 includes anotch 812N sized to be equal to or greater than a width of thepushbutton 872, such that once theinterface element 812 is positioned within theopening 866 thepushbutton 872 may be released and aportion 872A of thepushbutton 872 is positioned within thenotch 812N, as depicted inFIG. 15B . -
Attachment control 880 is utilized to engage the second element, for examplesecond element 740, with theelongate shaft 900. Thecontrol 880 includes alever 882 rotatably coupled to theshaft 900, thelever 882 being configured to rotate the shaft to enable engagement of theshaft 900 with thesecond element 740. Thecontrol 880 may further include aslide lock 884, which is configured to lock thelever control 882 such that theshaft 900 is maintained in a desired rotational orientation, during operation of an intervertebral device for example. - Turning to
FIGS. 16A and 16B , adistal end 902 ofelongate shaft 900 includes aprotrusion 904 adjacent to agroove 906. Theprotrusion 904 may be adapted to fit acorresponding groove 740G at a proximal end of the slidingelement 740. As depicted inFIG. 16A , theshaft 900 is angled or rotated along its axis such that theprotrusion 904 freely enters the proximal end of the slidingelement 740. Once inserted, theshaft 900 may be rotated, through operation of theattachment control 880 for example, such that theprotrusion 904 is positioned within thegroove 740G and held in place through the cooperation of theprotrusion 904 and aprotrusion 740P at the proximal end of sliding orthird element 740, as depicted inFIG. 46B . Thegroove 740G of the slidingelement 740 cooperates with theprotrusion 904 of theshaft 900 to rigidly attach theshaft 900 to theelement 740. Once theshaft 900 is rigidly attached to the sliding element 740 a user can translate the slidingelement 740 through corresponding translation of the shaft. - Turning to
FIGS. 17 and 18 , thehandle 862 may also include anaxial control 890 configured to translate theshaft 900 in proximal and distal directions, in a manner similar to how theelongate member 816 translates, for example. Theaxial control 890 includes arotational control 892 rotationally coupled to ashort shaft 894, theshort shaft 894 having threadedportion 894T that interfaces with corresponding threadedportion 862T of thehandle 862, theshort shaft 894 being coupled to theshaft 900.FIG. 17 depicts handle 862 without therotational control 892.Shaft 900 is axially coupled, not rotationally coupled, to theshort shaft 894. Accordingly, theaxial control 890 converts rotational movement of therotational control 892 into axial movement of theshaft 900. As therotational control 892 is rotated in a first direction theshort shaft 894 rotates and moves distally within thehandle portion 862, which acts to moveshaft 900 distally. As therotational control 892 is rotated in a second direction theshort shaft 894 rotates and moves proximally within thehandle portion 862, which acts to moveshaft 900 proximally. For example, translation of theshaft 900 results in the translation of the slidingelement 740, further resulting in the slidingelement 740 moving between theends base member 710. As the slidingelement 740 translates or moves between theends element 770 moves in a vertical direction with respect to thebase element 710 to change the overall height, H7, of theintervertebral device 700. - As depicted, the
axial control 890 may utilize a clutch 826C, similar to clutch 826 of thecontrol assembly 820. Such a clutch system may act to limit the axial force of theshaft 900, which may limit damage to the intervertebral device, or to the patient. - Turning to
FIG. 19 , thedelivery system 800 may further include a delivery tool configured to deliver therapeutic agents, such as those therapeutic agents described or contemplated herein, to an intervertebral device, such as those intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, which may be positioned or deployed between adjacent vertebra. Thedelivery tool 1000 may include aguide assembly 1010 and aninsertion assembly 1030, as better viewed inFIG. 20 . Theguide assembly 1010 may include ahandle portion 1012 and atubular member 1020, the tubular member having one end fixedly attached to thehandle portion 1012. Thetubular member 1020 may include alumen 1022 therethrough, the lumen having aninner diameter 1023 and being in fluid communication with alumen 1018 passing through thehandle portion 1012. Thelumen 1018 may include an inner diameter sized similar to thelumen 1022 of thetubular member 1020 at or near where thetubular member 1020 is attached to thehandle portion 1012, and then may increase such that aninner surface 1019 of thelumen 1018 may be configured to accept a portion of theinsertion assembly 1030, as described in greater detail below. - The
handle portion 1012 may also include aninterface assembly 1014, similar tointerface assembly 870 of theexpansion tool 860 as part of thedelivery system 800, and discussed with respect toFIGS. 15A and 15B above, theinterface assembly 1014 configured to attach or interface thehandle portion 1012 with theattachment assembly 810 ofdelivery system 800, for example. More specifically, theinterface assembly 1014 may include apushbutton 1016 and interface with theinterface element 812 of theattachment assembly 810 in a similar fashion asinterface assembly 870, as described in greater detail above with respect toFIGS. 15A and 15B . - Turning also to
FIG. 21 , theinsertion assembly 1030 is depicted in partial section view and may include ahandle portion 1032, shown in bulbous form, and anelongate member 1040, which may be fixedly attached at one end to thehandle portion 1032. Theelongate member 1040 may include alumen 1042 therethrough and may include an outer diameter sized to allow themember 1040 to translate within thelumen 1022 ofelongate member 1020 of theguide assembly 1010. Theinsertion assembly 1030 may include aplunger assembly 1050 having aplunger control 1052 coupled to anelongate shaft 1054, which may also be viewed inFIG. 25A , theelongate shaft 1054 sized to translate within thelumen 1042 oftubular member 1040. - The
handle portion 1032 may include one ormore surface protrusions 1034 which may allow better grip and control of theinsertion tool 1030 during use.Handle portion 1032 may also include a cylindricaldistal portion 1036, which may be sized to interface with and translate within a portion of thelumen 1018 ofhandle portion 1012. - With specific reference to
FIGS. 21 and 22 , theplunger assembly 1050, as part of theinsertion assembly 1030, is shown coupled to theguide assembly 1010. The cylindricaldistal portion 1036 of theinsertion assembly 1030 is slidably positioned within a portion oflumen 1018 of thehandle portion 1012 of theguide assembly 1010. As shown, theplunger control 1052 is coupled toshaft 1054 and configured to selectively translate within thelumen 1042 of theelongate member 1040 of theinsertion assembly 1030. Theplunger assembly 1050 may include aretaining ring 1056, aspring retainer 1058 and aspring 1060. The retainingring 1056 is fixedly attached to theshaft 1054 and retains thespring retainer 1058 and thespring 1060 about the elongate member when theplunger assembly 1050 is decoupled and removed from theinsertion assembly 1030, for sterilization purposes for example. The retainingring 1056 is fixedly attached to theshaft 1054 and is slidably received within alumen 1038 of thehandle portion 1032. Thespring retainer 1058 is slidably coupled to theshaft 1054 and, along with theplunger control 1052, retains thespring 1060.Spring 1060 allows for momentary movement of theplunger assembly 1050, as discussed in greater detail below. - The
plunger control 1052 may include one ormore tab portions 1052T, which may be slidably coupled withcompatible slot portions 1032S of thehandle portion 1032. A retainingportion 1032R of thehandle portion 1032 may be positioned adjacent to acorresponding slot portion 1032S and may prevent the decoupling and removal of theplunger assembly 1050 from theinsertion assembly 1030.Certain slot portions 1032S, such as specific slot portion 1032S1, may be provided without a retainingportion 1032R allowing a user to rotate theplunger assembly 1050 with respect to theinsertion assembly 1030, aligning thetabs 1052T with the corresponding slot portions 1032S1 (only one shown in the cross section view ofFIGS. 22 and 22 ) allowing for decoupling and removal of theplunger assembly 1050 from theguide assembly 1010, for purposes of sterilization for example. - The
shaft 1054 of theplunger assembly 1050 may translate within thelumen 1042 of theelongate member 1040 of theinsertion assembly 1030, and may be utilized to deploy one or more therapeutic agents within an intervertebral device, such as one or more of the intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein. The applied one or more therapeutic agents may fill the internal voids of the intervertebral device, and exit one or more openings thereof, the therapeutic agents coming into contact with surrounding tissue, vertebral tissue for example. To assist in deployment of a therapeutic agent, theplunger control 1052 may be depressed with respect to the remaining of theplunger assembly 1050 and guideassembly 1010, a distal end of theelongate shaft 1054 deploying the therapeutic agent.FIG. 21 depicts theplunger control 1052 in a rest position, andFIG. 22 depicts theplunger control 1052 in a depressed position. While in the depressed position, theplunger control 1052 may compress thespring 1060 between thespring retainer 1058 and theplunger control 1052. When application force is removed from theplunger control 1052, thespring 1060 acts to move theplunger control 1052 back to its resting position, as depicted inFIG. 21 . It should be noted that the various characteristics of theplunger assembly 1050 and theinsertion assembly 1030 may be modified to provide a desired amount of travel of theelongate shaft 1054 when theplunger control 1052 is depressed, resulting in a corresponding amount of therapeutic agent deployed for example. -
FIG. 23A depicts, for illustration purposes only, theattachment assembly 810 coupled to theintervertebral device 700, theexpansion tool 860 being detached from theattachment assembly 810 and theguide assembly 1010 being inserted into theattachment assembly 810 in place thereof. Theguide assembly 1010 may be attached or coupled to theattachment assembly 810 in similar fashion as theexpansion tool 860 is attached to theattachment assembly 810, as described above. Once theguide assembly 1010 is coupled to theattachment assembly 810, theinsertion assembly 1030 may be coupled to theguide assembly 1010, as generally depicted inFIG. 23B . Theinsertion assembly 1030 may be coupled to theguide assembly 1010 prior to coupling theguide assembly 1010 with theattachment assembly 810, if desired.FIG. 24A depicts theinsertion assembly 1030 fully coupled to theguide assembly 1010, the cylindricaldistal portion 1036 of the insertion assembly slidably positioned within a portion of thelumen 1018 of thehandle portion 1012 of theguide assembly 1010. As depicted in the section view ofFIG. 24B , when theinsertion assembly 1030 is fully coupled to theguide assembly 1010, adistal end 1040D of theelongate member 1040 may be adjacent to an opening of theintervertebral device 700. Prior to this coupling, thelumen 1022 of theelongate member 1020 of theguide assembly 1010 may be filled with a desired amount of therapeutic agent. For example, a measured amount of the therapeutic agent may be positioned within thelumen 1018 and advanced withinlumen 1022 of theelongate member 1020. Insertion or coupling of theinsertion assembly 1030 with theguide assembly 1010 may then result in the deployment of a portion of the therapeutic agent within theintervertebral device 700, e.g., withinvoid 702, and out of the various openings of thedevice 700 and into contact with surrounding biological tissue. Theinsertion assembly 1030 may be removed from theguide assembly 1010 to allow insertion of additional therapeutic agent material into thelumen 1022 of theelongate member 1020, if desired, the additional material deployed by theplunger assembly 1050 as described immediately above. This process may be repeated as necessary to deploy a desired amount of therapeutic agent within the intervertebral device and surrounding tissue. Turning toFIG. 25A , a sectional view of theattachment assembly 810 is depicted. In this view theplunger control 1052 is depicted in a depressed position, adistal tip 1054D of theelongate shaft 1054 advancing into theintervertebral device 700, e.g., into thevoid 702. In this way, additional portions of the one or more therapeutic agents positioned within the distal portion of thelumen 1022 of theguide assembly 1010 may be advanced by thedistal tip 1054D of theelongate shaft 1054, as generally represented byarrows 1054A inFIG. 25B . - Utilization of the
guide assembly 1010 andinsertion assembly 1030, in conjunction with theattachment assembly 810, to deploy one or more therapeutic agents to an intervertebral device and surrounding biological tissue is advantageous. Once the intervertebral device is positioned, theexpansion tool 860 may be removed and the various structures of theattachment assembly 810 may now be utilized to deploy one or more of the therapeutic agents, as described above. In this way, theattachment assembly 810 may serve multiple functions in operative procedures making such procedures easier to perform, and safer and less costly for the patient. - Turning now to
FIG. 26 , another exemplaryintervertebral device 1100 includes a first orbase element 1110, a second or slidingelement 1140, and athird element 1170. Theintervertebral device 1100 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, however, thethird element 1170 is adapted to also rotate with respect to theother elements intervertebral device 1100. Thetop surface 1171 may include first, second, third, and forthcorner portions second element 1140 and thethird element 1170 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1171 c of thetop surface 1171 move at one of a plurality of rates as thesecond element 1140 translates with respect to thethird element 1170. In this way, thethird element 1170 may have a top planar surface that rotates, or otherwise is angled, with respect to a bottom planar surface of thebase element 1110 as the slidingelement 1140 translates from a proximal position to a distal position. Furthermore, as described in greater detail below, a top planar surface of thethird element 1170 may be initially angled with respect to a bottom planar surface of thebase element 1110, such that when thethird element 1170 is elevated, its top planar surface may form a complex angle with respect to a bottom planar surface of thebase element 1110. As described with respect to other intervertebral devices, theintervertebral device 1100 includes aproximal end 1112 and adistal end 1114, and theproximal end 1112 may include a structure used for positioning and operating thedevice 1100, through use of theattachment assembly 810 for example. - Turning also to
FIGS. 27 and 28 , in which perspective views of the exemplaryintervertebral device 1100 is depicted in cut view along section A-A ofFIG. 26 . As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, and better understood in light of the discussion below, theelements intervertebral device 1100 geometric height, H8, may have a minimum height in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 27 , and a maximum height in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 28 . - The
first element 1110, also referred to as base 1110 orbase element 1110, may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for theintervertebral device 1100, and includes afirst end 1112, asecond end 1114, and two side portions, a first side portion 1116 (as shown inFIG. 26 ) and an opposingside portion 1118. Abottom portion 1120 includes one ormore openings 1122, allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example. The second andthird elements proximal end 1112 may include anopening 1130 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking theintervertebral device 1100 in a specific configuration, for example. As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, utilizing a single connecting point on thedevice 1100 for interfacing with a tool that can allow for other tools to be easily attached, tools for expanding, contracting or locking thedevice 1100 in a specific configuration, or tools for delivery of therapeutic materials, provides for a more efficient system, allowing a user to more easily place, position, manipulate, and operate thedevice 1100. - The
intervertebral device 1100 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H8, between a first collapsed height H8-1, as depicted inFIG. 27 , and second expanded heights H8-2P and H8-2D, as depicted inFIG. 28 . As described in greater detail below, since thethird element 1170 is configured to rotate with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1100 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration, a distal portion of thethird element 1170 may have a second height H8-2D and a proximal portion of thethird element 1170 may have a second height H8-2P. For example, theintervertebral device 1100 may be expanded from a first position, having a height of H8-1 as depicted inFIG. 27 , to a second position, having a maximum distal height of H8-2D and a maximum proximal height of H8-2P as depicted inFIG. 28 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that position. - The
proximal end 1112 may also include structures, such asprotrusions 1130P andgrooves 1130G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect todelivery device 800 ofFIG. 6 , for example. Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning theintervertebral device 1100, for example between two adjacent vertebrae. As described in greater detail above, thedelivery system 800 may include tubular members through which tools to operate thedevice 1100, i.e., expand or contract theintervertebral device 1100, or deliver one or more therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within theintervertebral device 1100 and exiting through the one ormore openings 1122 of theelement 1110 or one ormore openings 1172 ofelement 1170, or additional similar openings of theelements - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the
third element 1170 may be slidably interfaced to the first andsecond elements third element 1170 at least slides vertically with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1170 may include one ormore openings 1172 in the top portion orsurface 1171 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough. Thetop portion 1171 may include one ormore protrusions 1174 that may aide in holding thetop portion 1171 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only afew protrusions 1174 are identified, additional orless protrusions 1174 may be utilized.Such protrusion structures 1174 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form. Additionally, sidewalls 1116, 1118 ofelement 1110 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and a bottom portion orsurface 1120 ofbase 1110 may include one ormore protrusions 1121.Protrusions 1121 may be, for example, similar toprotrusions 1174, which may aide in holding abottom portion 1120 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example. - The
first element 1110 may include a positioning structure orprotrusion 1124, which may be configured or adapted to move within a correspondingchannel 1176 to ensure thethird element 1170 moves in a specific direction with respect to thebase element 1110. In this case, theprotrusion 1124 andcorresponding channel 1176 may be curvilinear to allow for rotation of thethird element 1170 with respect to thesecond element 1140 as thesecond element 1140 translates. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, a void or
space 1102 is defined by the first, second, andthird elements intervertebral device 1100, thevoid 1102 increasing as thedevice 1100 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. In this way, once thedevice 1100 is deployed, one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within thevoid 1102. As described above, such therapeutic agents may further flow out of thevoid 1102 via additional openings, such asopenings elements - In operation, the
third element 1170 ofintervertebral device 1100 at least rotates with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1100 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second andthird elements intervertebral device 1100 may be curvilinear to encourage at least rotational movement of thethird element 1170 with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1170 to move at different rates with respect to other portions thereof, while maintaining constant or near constant surface contact between the curvilinear surfaces of thethird element 1170 and thesecond element 1140. More specifically, thethird element 1170 may include a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1178 that are configured or adapted to come in contact along a respective one of a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1148 ofsecond element 1140. Curvilinear surfaces 1178 may include a first pair ofcurvilinear surfaces 1178A and a second par ofcurvilinear surfaces 1178B and these curvilinear surfaces may interface with correspondingcurvilinear surfaces second element 1140, respectively. Accordingly, as the second element or slidingelement 1140 translates between thefirst end 1112 and thesecond end 1114 of thebase element 1110, the curvilinear surfaces 1148 of thesecond element 1140 contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1178 of thethird element 1170 resulting in movement of theelement 1170 in at least a vertical direction. - For purposes herein, the term “curvilinear surfaces” includes surfaces of any length down to a point surface. Accordingly, and for illustration purposes only, one or more of the curvilinear surfaces 1148 of the sliding
element 1140 may be point surfaces, or otherwise surfaces having dimensions that minimalize into a point contact, that contact and interact with a respective one of the curvilinear surfaces 1178 of thethird element 1170. Alternatively, one or more of the curvilinear surfaces 1178 may be point surfaces, or otherwise surfaces having dimensions that minimalize into a point contact, that contact and interact with a respective one of the curvilinear surfaces 1148 of the slidingelement 1140. It should be noted that increase contact surface area between the curvilinear surfaces 1148, 1178 may lead to increased strength. - As depicted, translation of sliding
element 1140 from thefirst end 1112 toward thesecond end 1114 results in movement of theelement 1170 in at least a vertical direction away from thebase element 1110, thethird element 1170 rotating with respect to the first andsecond elements element 1140 in a direction from thesecond end 1114 toward thefirst end 1112 results in movement of theelement 1170 in at least a vertical direction toward thebase element 1110, thethird element 1170 once again rotating with respect to the first andsecond elements top surface 1171 of thethird element 1170 being substantially parallel with thebottom surface 1120 of thefirst element 1110 when thedevice 1100 returns to its collapsed configuration. - Curvilinear surfaces 1148A of the
second element 1140 andcurvilinear surfaces 1178A of thethird element 1170 may define a first circle having a radius R1 (not shown), whilecurvilinear surface 1148B of the second element andcurvilinear surface 1178B of thethird element 1170 may define a second circle having a radius R2 (not shown), which is greater than the radius R1. First and second circles are concentric allowing for all interfacing surfaces to be in intimate contact during activation. As thesecond element 1140 moves distally, differences in radii R1 and R2 result in portions of thethird element 1170 moving vertically at differing rates. For example,corner portions third element 1170 may move vertically at a faster rate thancorner portions third element 1170, resulting in at least rotational movement of thethird element 1170 with respect to the first andsecond elements FIG. 28 , when thesecond element 1140 is in its most distal position, a maximum height of thethird element 1170 is H8-2D and a minimum height of thethird element 1170 is H8-2P, thetop surface 1171 of thethird element 1170 forming an angle LA8 with respect to a bottom surface of thebase element 1110. For illustration purposes only, the height H8-2D may have a maximum of 12 mm, and the height H8-2P may have a maximum range from between 7 mm to about 12 mm, depending on the desired angle LA8, which may range from between about 0° to about 15°. As should be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art, the radii R1 and R2 may be selected to provide for larger or smaller rates of rotation of thethird element 1170 with respect to thefirst element 1110 - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the first element or
base element 1110 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1136 that protrude from a top inner surface of thebottom portion 1120 ofelement 1110.Second element 1140 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1150, at least one of theelements 1150 engaging a respective one of the plurality ofengaging elements 1136. While depicted as being integral to therespective elements engaging elements base element 1110 and slidingelement 1140, respectively. As with theengaging elements intervertebral device 700, theengaging elements element - As with
intervertebral device 700, theintervertebral device 1100 may be configured such that applying a linear force to the slidingelement 1140 to translate theelement 1140 between the first andsecond ends base member 1110, results in eachengaging element 1150 sliding up and over a correspondingengaging element 1136, and engaging an adjacentengaging element 1136 in the direction of the movement of slidingelement 1140. Accordingly, slidingelement 1140, while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of thebase element 1110, may also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of theengaging elements element 1140 andbase element 1110, respectively. - The
intervertebral device 1100 may further include a plurality ofpins 1145 coupled to slidingmember 1140 and extending throughcorresponding openings 1128 in theside portions 1116, 1118 ofbase element 1110, theopenings 1128 may be similar toopenings 728 of theintervertebral device 700. With theintervertebral device 1100 in the collapsed configuration, as depicted inFIG. 27 , the slidingelement 1140 is nearer thefirst end 1112, thepins 1145 being nearer thefirst end 1112, as well. With theintervertebral device 1100 in the expanded configuration, as depicted inFIG. 28 , the slidingelement 1140 is nearer the distal end orsecond end 1114, thepins 1145 being nearer thesecond end 1114, as well. Theopenings 1128 of thefirst element 1110 may be spaced to allow some vertical travel of the slidingelement 1140 andpins 1145 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of theengaging elements engaging elements element 1140 in the presence of a compression force between thetop surface 1171 ofelement 1170 and thebottom portion 1120 of thebase element 1110 may differ in accordance with thecorresponding element engaging elements element 1140 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1110 with respect to movement of the slidingelement 1140 in a second opposite direction. In any case, theengaging elements third element 1170 and thebase element 1110. - Turning specifically to
FIG. 28 , the slidingelement 1140 may include aprotrusion 1144 configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion or groove 1136A, 1138A (not shown) of thethird element 1170. Theprotrusion 1144 may cooperate with recessedportion 1136A such that when the slidingelement 1140 translates in a distal direction, in a direction towarddistal end 1114 of the intervertebral device for example, one or more surfaces of theprotrusion 1144 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessedportion 1136A to encourage thethird element 1170 to move vertically and rotationally away from thefirst element 1110. Additionally, theprotrusion 1144 may cooperate with the recessedportion 1136A such that when the slidingelement 1140 translates in a proximal direction, in a direction toward theproximal end 1112 of theintervertebral device 1110 for example, one or surfaces of theprotrusion 1144 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessedportion 1136A to encourage thethird element 1170 to move vertically and rotationally toward thefirst element 1110. - As with
vertebral device 700, in the presence of a linear force applied to slidingelement 1140 moving theelement 1140 toward thedistal end 1114, in a ratcheting manner, for example, theengaging elements engaging elements element 1140 translates, thethird element 1170 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H8, of thedevice 1100. With a compression force applied between thethird element 1170 and thebase element 1110, e.g. when thedevice 1100 is positioned between adjacent tissue surfaces, such as two adjacent vertebrae, theengaging elements element 1140 andbase element 1110, respectively, engage and prevent the slidingelement 1140 from further translating. For illustration purposes only, the slidingelement 1140 of theintervertebral device 1100 may be translated through the use of a tool, such asexpansion tool 860 described above for example, the distal portion of the slidingelement 1140 includingprotrusions 1140P andgrooves 1140G, as best viewed inFIGS. 29 and 30 discussed immediately below, to interface with theexpansion tool 860, for example. - Turning to
FIGS. 29 and 30 , theintervertebral device 1100 is depicted in an elevation via cross-section along section B-B ofFIG. 26 . Theintervertebral device 1100 is depicted in a collapsed configuration inFIG. 29 and in an expanded configuration inFIG. 30 . In particular, the slidingelement 1140 may include aretention device 1160 to aide in maintaining contact between theengaging elements element 1140, as better viewed with respect toFIGS. 27 and 28 , andbase element 1110, respectively. Theretention device 1160 may include apin 1145A and aspring 1147, both depicted in cross section, thespring 1147 seated in abore 1146 of thesecond element 1140. Thepin 1145A may extend from a first opening 1123 in side portion 1116 (not shown) of thebase element 1100 to a second opening 1123 in side portion 1118 (not shown) of thebase element 1100. Thepin 1145A may include acentral protrusion 1162 that extends from a central longitudinal axis of thepin 1145A toward thebottom 1120 of thefirst element 1110 within thespring 1147, retaining thepine 1145A to thespring 1147. - In operation, as the sliding
element 1140 translates between the two ends 1112, 1114, theengaging elements element 1140 repeatedly moving vertically away from, and toward to, thebottom portion 1120 of thebase element 1110. As the slidingelement 1140 moves away from thebase element 1110 the ends of thepin 1145A may engage the top surfaces of the corresponding openings 1123 inrespective side portions 1116, 1118, acting to compress thespring 1147. As theengaging elements 1150 of the slidingelement 1140 pass over the correspondingengaging elements 1136 of thebase element 1110 thespring 1147 imparts a force upon the slidingelement 1140 to encourage re-engagement of the adjacentengaging elements engaging elements 1150 are biased to remain coupled to correspondingengaging elements 1136 during movement of the slidingelement 1140, particularly in a no-load situation, where the force between thethird element 1170 and thefirst element 1110 is minimal, for example. Accordingly, when a compression force is applied between thetop surface 1171 of thethird element 1170 and thebottom surface 1120 of thebase element 1110, engagingelements elements intervertebral device 1100. - It may be desirable to provide intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, including
intervertebral device 1100, for example, with angular top surfaces to better engage surrounding biological tissues, such as adjacent vertebral structures. Such angular top surfaces can allow for such engagement of surrounding biological tissues when positioned with differing methods, including TLIF and PLIF approaches, or other approaches known in the art. Turning toFIGS. 31A and 31B , an alternativeintervertebral device 1100A is depicted in a first collapsed configuration. The alternativeintervertebral device 1100A is similar todevice 1100, including afirst element 1110 and asecond element 1140, however theintervertebral device 1100A may include athird element 1170A in place ofthird element 1170. Thethird element 1170A may be similar tothird element 1170 except thethird element 1170A may include atop surface 1171 that forms anangle 1171A along its longitudinal axis with respect to a top surface of thefirst element 1110, as generally depicted.FIG. 31A depicts theintervertebral device 1100A from itsproximal end 1112, whileFIG. 31B depicts theintervertebral device 1100A from itsdistal end 1114.FIG. 31A further depicts void 1102 defined by the first, second andthird elements recesses 1132 that may encourage attachment to a delivery tool, as described in greater detail above. -
FIGS. 32A and 32B depict theintervertebral device 1100A in its expanded configuration. As shown, since thethird element 1170A includes an angledtop surface 1171 and thethird element 1170A rotates with respect to thesecond element 1140 as thedevice 1100A expands, thetop surface 1171 of thethird element 1170A takes on a planar surface that is angled with respect to both a longitudinal axis and a lateral axis of theintervertebral device 1100A, the angle offset along the longitudinal axis being the angle LA8 as better viewed inFIG. 30 , and the angle offset along the lateral axis being theangle 1171A as best viewed inFIGS. 31A-31B . - Turning to
FIGS. 33A and 33B , for illustration purposes only, anintervertebral device 1100A is depicted in its expanded configuration between adjacentvertebral bodies intervertebral device 1100A is not parallel to either ananterior axis 14 or alateral axis 16 of thevertebral bodies top surface 1171 ofthird element 1170A to anatomically match the natural angular differences between the adjacentvertebral bodies intervertebral device 1100A may make better contract with adjacent vertebral bodies, which may allow for stronger bonds between theintervertebral device 1100A and the adjacent vertebral bodies. While depicted and described with respect to certain characteristics of theintervertebral device 1100A, angles LA8 and 1171A may be oriented differently to allow for differing approaches. - Turning now to
FIG. 34 , another exemplaryintervertebral device 1200 includes a first orbase element 1210, a second or slidingelement 1240, and athird element 1270. Theintervertebral device 1200 is generally similar tointervertebral device 1100, however, thethird element 1270 is adapted to move rotationally and linearly with respect to theother elements third element 1270 may have a topplanar surface 1271 that is angled with respect to a bottomplanar surface 1220 of thebase element 1210, the angled surface being able to further move vertically with respect to thebase element 1210 to increase the overall height of theintervertebral device 1200. Furthermore, as described in greater detail above with respect tointervertebral device 1100A, a top planar surface of thethird element 1270 may be initially angled with respect to a bottom planar surface of thebase element 1210, such that when thethird element 1270 is at least elevated, its top planar surface may form a complex angle with respect to a bottom planar surface of thebase element 1210. Theintervertebral device 1200 includes aproximal end 1212 and adistal end 1214, theproximal end 1212 includinggeometric structures intervertebral device 1200, as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments. - Turning also to
FIGS. 35, 36, and 37 , a perspective view of the exemplaryintervertebral device 1200 is depicted in cut view along section A-A ofFIG. 34 . As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein and better understood in light of the discussion below, theelements intervertebral device 1200 geometric height, H9, may have a minimum value when thedevice 1200 is in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 35 , an intermediate value when thedevice 1200 is in an intermediate configuration, one example of which is generally depicts inFIG. 36 , and a maximum when thedevice 1200 is in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 37 , and discussed in greater detail below. - The
first element 1210, also referred to as base 1210 orbase element 1210, may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for theintervertebral device 1200, and includesfirst end 1212,second end 1214, and two side portions, a first side portion 1216 (not shown) and an opposingside portion 1218. Abottom portion 1220 includes one ormore openings 1222 allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example. It should be readily understood that the second andthird elements proximal end 1212 may include anopening 1230 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking theintervertebral device 1200 in a specific configuration, for example. Such one or more tools may includedelivery system 800 and thedelivery tool 1000. - The
intervertebral device 1200 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H9, between a first collapsed height H9-1, as depicted inFIG. 35 , second expanded heights H9-2P and H9-2D, as depicted generally inFIG. 36 , and third expanded heights H9-3P and H9-3D, as depicted inFIG. 37 . As described in greater detail below, since thethird element 1270 is configured to rotate and linearly move with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1200 is in an expanded configuration, a distal portion of thethird element 1270 may have a first height H9-3D and a proximal portion of thethird element 1270 may have a second height H9-3P. For example, theintervertebral device 1200 may be at least rotationally expanded from a first position, having the height of H9-1 as depicted inFIG. 35 , to a second position, having a distal height of H9-2D and a proximal height of H9-2P as depicted inFIG. 36 , and then linearly expanded to a third position, having a distal height of H9-3D and a proximal height of H9-3D as depicted inFIG. 37 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that position. - The
proximal end 1212 of theintervertebral device 1200 may also include structures, such asprotrusions 1230P andgrooves 1230G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect todelivery device 800 ofFIG. 6 , for example. Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning theintervertebral device 1200, for example between two adjacent vertebrae, through an approach described or contemplated herein, or otherwise known in the art. As described in greater detail above, thedelivery system 800 may include tubular members through which therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within theintervertebral device 1200 and exiting through the one ormore openings 1222 of theelement 1210 or one ormore openings 1272 of theelement 1270, or other similar openings of theelements - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the
third element 1270 may be slidably interfaced to the first andsecond elements third element 1270 at least rotates and/or slides vertically with respect to the first andsecond elements top portion 1271 may include one ormore protrusions 1274 that may aide in holding thetop surface 1271 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example. While only afew protrusions 1274 are identified, additional orless protrusions 1274 may be utilized.Such protrusion structures 1274 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form and may be applied to any embodiment described or contemplated herein. Additionally, sidewalls 1216, 1218 ofelement 1210 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and abottom portion 1220 ofbase 1210 may include one ormore protrusions 1221.Protrusions 1221 may be, for example, similar to or different fromprotrusions 1274, and may aide in holding abottom portion 1220 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures. - The
element 1210 may include a positioning structure or protrusion 1224, which may be configured or adapted to move within a corresponding channel 1276A to ensure that theelement 1270 moves in a specific manner with respect to thebase element 1210. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, a void or
space 1202 is defined by the first, second, andthird elements intervertebral device 1200, the void increasing as thedevice 1200 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. In this way, once thedevice 1200 is deployed, one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within thevoid 1202, via thedelivery system 800 ofFIG. 6 , for example. Such therapeutic agents may further flow out of the open space via additional openings, such asopenings elements - The
third element 1270 ofintervertebral device 1200 at least rotates and moves linearly with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1200 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second andthird elements intervertebral device 1200 may include both curvilinear and linear portions to encourage at least rotational movement and linear movement of thethird element 1270 with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1270 to move at different rates with respect to the first andsecond elements top surface 1271 may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1271 C1, 1271 C2, 1271 C3, 1271 C4, respectively, and 1271C collectively. Thesecond element 1240 and thethird element 1270 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1270C of thetop surface 1171 move at one of a plurality of rates as thesecond element 1240 translates a first distance with respect to thethird element 1270, and similar rates as thesecond element 1240 translates a second distance with respect to thethird element 1270. More specifically, thethird element 1270 may include one or morecurvilinear surfaces 1278A and two or morelinear surfaces curvilinear surface 1278A may be configured or adapted to contact along a respective one of a plurality ofcurvilinear surfaces 1248A ofsecond element 1240, while the two or morelinear surfaces linear surfaces element 1240 initially translates between thefirst end 1212 and thesecond end 1214 of thebase element 1210, thecurvilinear surfaces 1248A contact and slide along corresponding respectivecurvilinear surfaces 1278A of thethird element 1270, and thelinear surface 1278C may contact and slide alonglinear surface 1248C at a specific location, such asnear location 1248P as best viewed inFIG. 35 , resulting in at least rotational movement of theelement 1270 with respect to the first andsecond elements linear surface 1278C with respect to a generalized or averaged slope ofcurvilinear surface 1278A. While shown as curvilinear, thesurface 1278A may be linear if desired, however acurvilinear surface 1278A may allow for better contact between thesurfaces -
Curvilinear surface 1248A of the second element andcurvilinear surface 1278A of thethird element 1270 may define a circle having a radius R, which defines a rate of curvature in conjunction with the slope oflinear surface 1278C and, ultimately, differing rates of vertical movement along thetop surface 1271 of thethird element 1270, resulting in a top surface having a slope with respect to thebottom surface 1220 of thefirst element 1210. Therefore, the portion of thethird element 1270 more distal may increase in height at a faster rate than the portion of thethird element 1270 more proximal, resulting in rotational movement of thethird element 1270 with respect to thebase element 1210. - As the
second element 1240 translates from theproximal end 1212 and toward thedistal end 1214 of theintervertebral device 1200, thethird element 1270 rotates with respect to the first andsecond elements linear surface 1248B comes into contact withsurface 1278B, as can be viewed inFIG. 36 . At this point,linear surface 1248C may contactlinear surface 1278C along a greater portion than what is represented bypoint 1248P ofFIG. 35 , for example. As depicted inFIG. 36 , an angle LA9 is defined by thetop surface 1271 ofthird element 1270 with respect to thebottom surface 1220 of thebase element 1210. Angle LA9 may be the maximum angle achieved, thethird element 1270 moving in the vertical direction upon further translation of thesecond element 1240 toward thedistal end 1214 of theintervertebral device 1200, for example. It should be noted that this angle LA9 may be defined through differing curvilinear surfaces. For example,curvilinear surfaces linear surfaces FIGS. 65-67 , each combination resulting in one of numerous different angles defined by thetop surface 1271 of thethird element 1270 andbottom surface 1220 of thefirst element 1210. Such different angles may be greater than or less than angle LA9, for example. - As depicted, when the
linear surfaces linear surfaces intervertebral device 1200 may have a proximal height H9-2P and a distal height H9_2D. At this time, thevoid 1202 may have increased due to the expansion of theintervertebral device 1200 through initial rotational movement of thethird element 1270 with respect to the first andsecond elements second element 1240 continues to move towarddistal end 1214 of theintervertebral device 1200, thelinear surfaces second element 1240 move alonglinear surfaces third element 1270, respectively, resulting in at least continued vertical movement of thethird element 1270 with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1270 continues to rotate, as well as move vertically, with respect to thebase element 1210. In this case, thecurvilinear surfaces - With reference to
FIG. 37 , as thesecond element 1240 reaches a point closer to thedistal end 1214 of theintervertebral device 1200, the third element reaches a maximum height, as compared to thebase element 1210, for example. Since thethird element 1270 first rotated, then moved vertically, with respect to the first andsecond elements top surface 1271 of thethird element 1270 moved vertically at different rates. These different rates result in a maximum proximal height H9-3D and a maximum distal height H9-3D. Since the motion of thethird element 1270 from the configuration depicted inFIG. 36 to the expanded configuration ofFIG. 37 is primarily vertical with respect to first andsecond elements top surface 1271 with respect to thebottom surface 1220 of thefirst element 1210, LA9, remains relatively constant. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the first element or
base element 1210 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1236 that protrude from a top inner surface of thebottom portion 1220 ofelement 1210.Second element 1240 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1250, at least one of theelements 1250 engaging a respective one of the plurality ofengaging elements 1236. While depicted as being integral to therespective elements engaging elements base element 1210 and slidingelement 1240, respectively. As with theengaging elements intervertebral device 1100, theengaging elements element - As with other intervertebral devices described herein, the
intervertebral device 1200 is configured such that applying a lateral force to the slidingelement 1240 to translate theelement 1240 between the first andsecond ends base member 1210, results in eachengaging element 1250 sliding up and over a correspondingengaging element 1236, and engaging an adjacentengaging element 1236 in the direction of the movement of slidingelement 1240. Accordingly, slidingelement 1240, while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of thebase element 1210, also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of theengaging elements element 1240 andbase element 1210, respectively. - The
intervertebral device 1200 may further include a plurality ofpins 1245 coupled to slidingmember 1240 and extending through correspondinggroves 1228G in theside portions base element 1210, thegrooves 1228G being functionally similar toopenings 728 of theintervertebral device 700. With theintervertebral device 1200 in the collapsed configuration, as depicted inFIG. 35 , the slidingelement 1240 is nearer thefirst end 1212, thepins 1245 being nearer thefirst end 1212, as well. With theintervertebral device 1200 in the fully expanded configuration, as depicted inFIG. 37 , the slidingelement 1240 is nearer the distal end orsecond end 1214, thepins 1245 being nearer thesecond end 1214, as well. Thegrooves 1228G of thefirst element 1210 may be spaced to allow some vertical travel of the slidingelement 1240 andpins 1245 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of theengaging elements engaging elements element 1240 in the presence of a compression force between thetop portion 1271 ofelement 1270 and thebottom portion 1220 of thebase element 1210 may differ in accordance with thecorresponding element engaging elements element 1240 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1210 with respect to the slidingelement 1240 in a second opposite direction. In any case, theengaging elements third element 1270 and thebase element 1210. - Turning back specifically to
FIG. 37 , the slidingelement 1240 may include aprotrusion 1244 configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion or groove 1236A along the inner wall of thethird element 1270. Theprotrusion 1244 may cooperate with recessedportion 1236A such that when the slidingelement 1240 translates in a distal direction, in a direction towarddistal end 1214 of theintervertebral device 1200 for example, one or more surfaces of theprotrusion 1244 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessedportion 1236A to encourage thethird element 1270 to move vertically and rotationally away from thefirst element 1210. Additionally, theprotrusion 1244 may cooperate with the recessedportion 1236A such that when the slidingelement 1240 translates in a proximal direction, in a direction toward theproximal end 1212 of theintervertebral device 1200 for example, one or more surfaces of theprotrusion 1244 may engage corresponding one or more surfaces of the recessedportion 1236A to encourage thethird element 1270 to move vertically and rotationally toward thefirst element 1210. - As with
vertebral device 700, in the presence of a linear force applied to slidingelement 1240 moving theelement 1240 towardend 1214, in a ratcheting manner, for example, theengaging elements engaging elements element 1240 translates, thethird element 1270 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H9, of theintervertebral device 1200. With a compression force applied between thethird element 1270 and thebase element 1210, e.g. when thedevice 700 is positioned between adjacent tissue surfaces, such as two adjacent vertebrae, theengaging elements element 1240 andbase element 1210, respectively, engage and prevent the slidingelement 1240 from further translating. For illustration purposes only, the slidingelement 1240 of theintervertebral device 1200 may be translated through the use of a tool or system, such asexemplary system 800 described above with respect tointervertebral device 700, the distal portion of the slidingelement 1240 includingprotrusions 1240P andgrooves 1240G similar toprotrusions 740P andgrooves 740G of theintervertebral device 700, adapted to interface with thedelivery system 800, for example. - Turning to
FIGS. 38-40 , theintervertebral device 1200 is depicted in cross-section along section B-B ofFIG. 34 . Theintervertebral device 1200 is depicted in a collapsed configuration inFIG. 38 and in a first expanded configuration inFIG. 39 , and a second expanded configuration inFIG. 40 . In particular, the slidingelement 1240 includes aretention device 1260, as an alternative to theretention device 1160 ofintervertebral device 1100, to aide in maintaining contact between theengaging element element 1240 andbase element 1210, respectively. Theretention device 1260 includes thepin 1245B andspring 1247, thespring 1247 depicted in cross section and seated in abore 1246. As depicted, thepin 1245B may extend from abore 1210B of thefirst element 1210 to void 1202. - In operation, as the sliding
element 1240 translates between the two ends 1212, 1214, theengaging elements element 1240 repeatedly moving vertically away from and toward to thebottom portion 1220 of thebase element 1210, as described above with respect to theintervertebral device 1200. As theengaging elements 1250 of the slidingelement 1240 pass over the correspondingengaging elements 1236 of thebase element 1210 thespring 1247 imparts a force upon the slidingelement 1240 to encourage re-engagement of the adjacentengaging elements engaging elements 1250 are biased to remain coupled to correspondingengaging elements 1236 during each movement of the slidingelement 1240, particularly in a no-load situation, where the force between thethird element 1270 and thefirst element 1210 is minimal for examples. Accordingly, when a compression force is applied between thetop surface 1271 of thethird element 1270 and thebottom surface 1220 of thebase element 1210, engagingelements elements intervertebral device 1200. - As described above with respect to the
intervertebral device 1100A ofFIGS. 31A and 31B , thethird element 1270 may include an angular top surface to better engage surrounding biological tissues, such as adjacent vertebral structures. Such angular top surfaces can allow for such engagement of surrounding biological tissues when positioned with differing methods, including TLIF and PLIF approaches. - The various mating curvilinear surfaces of the second and third elements of the various embodiments described herein may be adapted to provide a top surface of the intervertebral device, e.g., the top surface of the third element, at a desired angle with respect to a bottom surface of the intervertebral device, e.g., the bottom surface of the first element or base element. Such a desired angle may be selected in accordance with the approach taken to insert the intervertebral device between two adjacent vertebrae. In this way, the intervertebral device may be adapted to provide a desired height and angular configuration with respect to a specified approach such that the angular configuration matches the lordotic curvature of the spine, the lumbar or cervical regions of the spine, for example.
- Turning now to
FIGS. 41A, 41B, and 41C , another exemplaryintervertebral device 1300 includes a first orbase element 1310, a second or slidingelement 1340, and a third or liftingelement 1370. Theintervertebral device 1300 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or disclosed herein, however the first, second andthird elements third element 1370 is adapted to laterally rotate with respect to theother elements top surface 1371 that may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1371 C1, 1371 C2, 1371 C3, 1371 C4, respectively, and 1371 C collectively. Thesecond element 1340 and thethird element 1370 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1370C of thetop surface 1371 move at one of a plurality of rates as thesecond element 1340 translates with respect to thethird element 1370. More specifically, thefirst corner portion 1371 C1 andfourth corner portion 1371 C4 may have a first rate, and thesecond corner portion 1371 C2 andthird corner portion 1371 C3 may have a second rate, the second rate being greater than the first rate. In this way, for example, thethird element 1370 may have a topplanar surface 1371 that is angled with respect to a bottomplanar surface 1320 of thebase element 1310, as better viewed inFIGS. 41B and 41C , when theinterventional device 1300 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration, respectively. Furthermore, as described in greater detail above with respect tointervertebral device 1100A, atop surface 1371 of thethird element 1370 may be initially angled with respect to abottom surface 1320 of thebase element 1310 when in a collapsed configuration, such that when thethird element 1370 is at least elevated a portion, its top planar surface may form a desired angle with respect to the bottomplanar surface 1320 of thebase element 1310. Theintervertebral device 1300 includes aproximal end 1312 and adistal end 1314, as well as a firstlateral side 1316 and a secondlateral side 1318. Theproximal end 1312 may includegeometric structures intervertebral device 1300, as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments. The first, second, andthird elements - Turning specifically to
FIG. 41B , theintervertebral device 1300 is depicted in a collapsed configuration, theelongated shaft 900 of thedelivery system 800 engaged with the slidingelement 1340, in accordance with the discussion above with respect to attaching thesystem 800 to theintervertebral device 700. The graspingunit 840 and associated structures have been removed to allow for a better view of the operation. Thedelivery system 800 may include portions that interface with one ormore recesses 1332 to fixedly hold theintervertebral device 1300 in contact with thedelivery system 800, but such portions have been removed for this specific discussion. Turning also toFIG. 41C , when the elongate shaft 602 is translated towarddistal end 1314 of theintervertebral device 1300, in a direction indicated by arrow 41CA, the sliding orsecond element 1340 also translates in a distal direction. As the slidingelement 1340 moves distally various surfaces of the slidingelement 1340 cooperate with corresponding various surfaces of thelifting element 1370 such that thetop surface 1371 moves in a rotationally vertical direction away from thebase element 1310, for example, as described in greater detail below. - Turning to
FIGS. 42-45 , elevated side views of the exemplaryintervertebral device 1300 are depicted in cut view along section A-A ofFIG. 41A inFIGS. 42 and 44 and along section B-B ofFIG. 41A inFIGS. 43 and 45 . As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein and better understood in light of the discussion below, theelements intervertebral device 1300 geometric height, H10, may have a minimum value, H10-1, when thedevice 1300 is in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted inFIGS. 42 and 43 , a maximum height, H10-2, when thedevice 1300 is in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted inFIGS. 44 and 45 , and an intermediate value, H10, when thedevice 1300 is in an intermediate configuration therebetween. - The
first element 1310, also referred to as base 1310 orbase element 1310, may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for theintervertebral device 1300, and includes afirst end 1312, asecond end 1314, and two side portions, afirst side portion 1316 and an opposingside portion 1318, as better viewed, for example, inFIG. 41A . Abottom portion 1320 of thefirst element 1310 may include one ormore openings 1322, as depicted also inFIG. 41A , allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example. It should be readily understood that the second andthird elements proximal end 1312 may include anopening 1330 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking theintervertebral device 1300 in a specific configuration, for example. Such one or more tools may include, or be similar to,delivery system 800 and thedelivery tool 1000. - The
intervertebral device 1300 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H10, between a first collapsed height H10-1, as depicted inFIG. 72 , for example, and second expanded heights H10-2R and H10-2L, as depicted generally inFIGS. 46A and 46B . As described in greater detail below, since thethird element 1370 is configured to at least rotate with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1300 is in an expanded configuration, a first lateral portion of thethird element 1370 may have a first height H10-2R and a second lateral portion of thethird element 1370 may have a second height H10-2L, as viewed inFIGS. 46A and 46B , respectively. Theproximal end 1312 may also include structures, such asprotrusions 1330P andgrooves 1330G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect todelivery device 800 ofFIG. 6 , for example. Such attachment points may also form the basis for at least initially positioning theintervertebral device 1300, for example between two adjacent vertebrae, through an approach described or contemplated herein, or otherwise known in the art. As described in greater detail above, thedelivery system 800 may include tubular members through which therapeutic agents may be introduced, for example, to internal spaces within theintervertebral device 1300 and exiting through the one ormore openings 1322 of theelement 1310 or one ormore openings 1372 of theelement 1370, or other similar openings of theelements - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the
third element 1370 may be slidably interfaced to the first andsecond elements third element 1370 at least slides vertically with respect to the first andsecond elements top portion 1371 may include one ormore protrusions 1374 that may aide in holding thetop surface 1371 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example. While only afew protrusions 1374 are identified, additional orless protrusions 1374 may be utilized.Such protrusion structures 1374 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form and may be applied to any embodiment described or contemplated herein. Additionally, sidewalls 1316, 1318 ofelement 1310 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and abottom portion 1320 ofbase 1210 may include one ormore protrusions 1321.Protrusions 1321 may be, for example, similar to or different fromprotrusions 1374, and may aide in holding abottom portion 1320 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures. - Turning temporarily back to
FIG. 41A , thebase element 1310 may include a positioning structure orpin 1324P which may be configured or adapted to move within a correspondingchannel 1376A to ensure that theelement 1370 moves in a specific manner with respect to thebase element 1310. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, a void or
space 1302 is defined by the first, second, andthird elements intervertebral device 1300, the void increasing in volume as thedevice 1300 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. In this way, once thedevice 1300 is deployed, one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within thevoid 1302. Such therapeutic agents may further flow out of the open space via additional openings, such asopenings elements - The
third element 1370 ofintervertebral device 1300 at least rotates with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1300 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second andthird elements intervertebral device 1300 may include curvilinear portions to encourage at least rotational movement of the third element 130 with respect to the first andsecond elements top surface 1371 of thethird element 1370 and thebottom surface 1120 of thefirst element 1310 and a desired height, H10, when in an intermediate or expanded configuration. Such curvilinear surfaces may also allow for various portions of thethird element 1370 to move at different rates with respect to the first andsecond elements element 1340 translates between thefirst end 1312 and thesecond end 1314 of thebase element 1310, thecurvilinear surfaces 1348A contact and slide along corresponding respectivecurvilinear surfaces 1378A of thethird element 1370, and thecurvilinear surface 1378C may contact and slide alongcurvilinear surface 1348C at a specific location, resulting in at least rotational movement of theelement 1370 with respect to the first andsecond elements surface 1378C with respect to the geometry ofsurface 1378A. While thesurfaces lifting element 1370. In this example, the desired rotational movement of theintervertebral device 1300 results incurvilinear surfaces FIGS. 47-50 . - As shown in
FIGS. 44 and 45 , in the expanded configuration thetop surface 1371 of the third or liftingelement 1370 may be angled with respect to thebottom surface 1320 of thebase element 1310. Turning now toFIGS. 46A and 46B , the rightlateral portion 1370R of thelifting element 1370, which includessecond corner portion 1371 C2 andthird corner portion 1371 C3, achieves a height H10-2R in the expanded configuration, while the leftlateral portion 1370L of thelifting element 1370, which includesfirst corner portion 1371 C1 andfourth corner portion 1371 C4, achieves a height H10-2L. Thetop surface 1371 of thelifting element 1370 may define a geometric plane that forms an angle with respect to theplanar surface 1320 of thebase element 1310, the angle represented byangle 1371A. As is discussed below with respect toFIGS. 47-50 , thisangle 1371A may be defined such that a desired angle is achieved, with a corresponding desired height H10, when theintervertebral device 1300 is in its final configuration, which may be an intermediate configuration or its expanded configuration. - Turning to
FIGS. 47-50 , the formation of the certain various curvilinear surfaces 1348, 1378 of theintervertebral device 1300 will be described in greater detail, from which any suitable curvilinear surface may be derived, as part of one or more intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein for example. As with other embodiments described or contemplated herein, the parameters of theintervertebral device 1300 may first be defined. Such defined parameters may include a height, H10, both when in a collapsed configuration and when in an expanded configuration, as well as the desired angular relationship betweentop surface 1371 of thethird element 1370 and thebottom surface 1320 of thebase element 1310. For illustration purposes only, theintervertebral device 1300 may be defined to have an initial collapsed configuration height, H10-1, of 7 mm, and an expanded configuration height, H10-2R, of 12 mm, requiring a right lateral edge of the top surface including the second andthird corner portions angle 1371A of 10°, the center of axis, Rc, about which the right lateral edge rotates must first be determined. - With the highest outside edge of the
top surface 1371 of thethird element 1370 being 5 mm higher in the expanded position as compared to the inside edge of thetop surface 1371 of thethird element 1370, and with an angle of 10 degrees tilt of thetop surface 1371, a circle or arc must exist where it's radius times the sin of 10 degrees equals this height differential, 5 mm. That radius is approximately 1.15 inches, and if the cage is 0.5 inches wide, then the center of that radius is 1.15 inches from the farlateral side 1316 and 0.65 inches from thenear side 1318 of theintervertebral device 1300. The center of the arc of rotation is collinear with the axis that the top plate rotates about. This axis does not have to be coplanar with thetop surface 1371 of thethird element 1370, but can be positioned higher or lower than thetop surface 1371 of thethird element 1370, as desired, to best facilitate it moving with the first andsecond elements - The distance the second or sliding
element 1340 must be able to move distally must also be determined or defined. For example, we may desire for every 0.2 inches that the slidingelement 1340 moves in the distal direction, the top plate will rotate 10 degrees, e.g., having its outer edge of thetop surface 1371 elevated 0.2 inches. With specific reference toFIG. 49 , a circle, C, is drawn in a Right Plane with the center located on the axis of rotation, labeledAxis 1. A helical curve is drawn, as shown, starting at the 3 o'clock position (or 9 o'clock, depending on from what side you are looking at the circle), extending and rotating at a rate of 10 degrees per 0.2 inches, and rotating for at least some distance, for example, for 90 degrees as shown. A rectangular pattern RP is provided starting at a surface of a plane, labeledPlane 1, and transitioned along the helical path described above, forming a solid helical structure. A first side surface S1 of this solid helical structure defines the curvilinear surface of the two proximal surfaces, e.g., 1348A, 1348C, of the slidingelement 1340, as generally depicted inFIG. 50 . - The two
proximal surfaces element 1340 are relatively coplanar, however, don't necessarily need to be represented by the first side S1 of this one solid helical structure RP. Rather, each of theproximal surfaces Axis 1 and has it's rotation to distance ratio at 10 degrees per 0.20 inches. All the curvilinear surfaces 1348 of the slidingelement 1340 must share the same axis of rotation and rate of rotation, 10 degrees per 0.20 inches in this case. - The mating curvilinear surfaces 1378 of the
third element 1370 are simply the exact same curvilinear surfaces 1348 of thesecond element 1140, however, are defined by a solid helical structure coming from the opposite side of curvilinear surfaces 1348. - The first element or
base element 1310 may further include a plurality ofengaging elements 1336 protruding from a top inner surface of thebottom portion 1320 ofelement 1310.Second element 1340 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1350, at least one of theelements 1350 engaging a respective one of the plurality ofengaging elements 1336 of thebase element 1310. While depicted as being integral to therespective elements engaging elements base element 1310 and slidingelement 1340, respectively. Theengaging elements element -
intervertebral device 1300 may include further include a plurality ofpins 1345 coupled to slidingmember 1340. Rather than extending through openings, such asopening 728 ofintervertebral device 700, thepins 1345 may extend withingrooves 1328A on the inner walls ofside portions base element 1310, as best viewed inFIGS. 44 and 45 . These grooves may provide surfaces such that the pins behave similarly as if they extended through slots, as described above with respect tointervertebral device 700. With theintervertebral device 1300 in the collapsed configuration, as depicted inFIGS. 42 and 43 , the slidingelement 1340 is nearer thefirst end 1312, thepins 1345 being nearer thefirst end 1312, as well. With theintervertebral device 1300 in the expanded configuration, as depicted inFIGS. 44 and 45 , the slidingelement 1340 is nearer the distal end orsecond end 1314, thepins 1345 being nearer thesecond end 1314, as well. Thegrooves 1328A of thefirst element 1310 may be spaced to allow some vertical travel of the slidingelement 1340 andpins 1345 in accordance with the geometrical shapes, e.g. height, of theengaging elements 1336. It is noted that by adjusting the slope or curvilinear shape of each side surface of theengaging elements element 1340 in the presence of a compression force between thetop surface 1371 ofelement 1370 and thebottom portion 1320 of thebase element 1310 may differ in accordance with thecorresponding element engaging elements element 1340 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1310 with respect to movement of the slidingelement 1340 in a second opposite direction. In any case, theengaging elements third element 1370 and thebase element 1310. - As with
vertebral device 700, in the presence of a linear force applied to slidingelement 1340 moving theelement 1340 toward thedistal end 1314, in a ratcheting manner, for example, theengaging elements engaging elements element 1340 translates, thethird element 1370 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H10, of thedevice 1100. With a compression force applied between thethird element 1370 and thebase element 1310, e.g. when thedevice 1300 is positioned between adjacent tissue surfaces, such as two adjacent vertebrae, theengaging elements element 1340 andbase element 1310, respectively, engage and prevent the slidingelement 1340 from further translating. For illustration purposes only, the slidingelement 1340 of theintervertebral device 1300 may be translated through the use of a tool, such asexpansion tool 860 described above for example, the distal portion of the slidingelement 1340 including protrusions 1340P and grooves 1340G, similar toprotrusions 740P andgrooves 740G ofintervertebral device 700, for example. - Turning now to
FIGS. 51A, 51B, and 51C , yet another exemplaryintervertebral device 1400 includes a first orbase element 1410, a second or slidingelement 1440, and a third or liftingelement 1470. Theintervertebral device 1400 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or disclosed herein, however the first, second andthird elements third element 1470 is adapted to rotate with respect to theother elements third element 1470, a height of thedistal portion 1414 of thedevice 1400 being less than a height of theproximal portion 1412 when thedevice 1400 is in an expanded configuration. As with other embodiments described herein, thethird element 1470 may include atop surface 1471 that may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1471 C1, 1471 C2, 1471 C3, 1471 C4, respectively, and 1471 C collectively. Thesecond element 1440 and thethird element 1470 may be adapted such that each of the fourcorner portions 1470 C of thetop surface 1471 move at one of a plurality of rates as thesecond element 1440 translates with respect to thethird element 1470. More specifically, thefirst corner portion 1471 C1 andsecond corner portion 1471 C2 may have a first rate, and thethird corner portion 1471 C3 and forthcorner portion 1471 C4 may have a second rate, the second rate being greater than the first rate. In this way, for example, thethird element 1470 may have a topplanar surface 1471 that is angled with respect to a bottomplanar surface 1420 of thebase element 1410, as better viewed inFIGS. 51B and 51C , when theinterventional device 1400 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. Furthermore, as described in greater detail above with respect tointervertebral device 1100A, thetop surface 1471 of thethird element 1470 may be initially angled with respect to abottom surface 1420 of thebase element 1410 when in a collapsed configuration, such that when thethird element 1470 is at least elevated a portion, its topplanar surface 1471 may form a desired angle with respect to the bottomplanar surface 1420 of thebase element 1410. Theintervertebral device 1400 includes aproximal end 1412 and adistal end 1414, as well as a firstlateral side 1416 and a secondlateral side 1418. Theproximal end 1412 may includegeometric structures intervertebral device 1400, as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments. The first, second, andthird elements - Turning specifically to
FIG. 51B , theintervertebral device 1400 is depicted in a collapsed configuration. Thebase element 1410 and the slidingelement 1440 include various protrusions and grooves to allow for interfacing thedevice 1400 to a delivery system, such asdelivery system 800. For example, theelongated shaft 900 of thedelivery system 800 may engage the slidingelement 1340 and may engagegroove 1430G andprotrusion 1430P of thebase element 1410, both in accordance with the discussion above. Thedelivery system 800 may further include portions that interface with one ormore recesses 1432 to fixedly hold theintervertebral device 1400 in contact with thedelivery system 800. Turning also toFIG. 51C , when theelongate shaft 900 is translated towarddistal end 1414 of theintervertebral device 1400, in a direction indicated by arrow 51CA, the sliding orsecond element 1440 also translates in a distal direction. As the slidingelement 1440 moves distally various curvilinear surfaces of the slidingelement 1440 cooperate with corresponding various curvilinear surfaces of thelifting element 1470 such that thetop surface 1471 moves in a rotationally vertical direction away from thebase element 1410, for example, as described in greater detail below. - Turning now to
FIG. 52A , since theintervertebral device 1400 includes a slopedtop surface 1471 as compared to abottom surface 1420 of thebase 1410, in a collapsed position theintervertebral device 1400 may have a first distal height H11-1D and a first proximal height H11-1P. The top surface may define an angle 1471A1 with respect to a longitudinal axis parallel to thebottom surface 1420 of thebase 1410. In the collapsed configuration the sliding element 1430 is in its most proximal position. Turning now toFIG. 52B , the sliding element 1430 has moved from its most proximal position to its most distal position, thethird element 1470 rotating with respect to thebase element 1410 such that thetop surface 1471 has a second distal height H11-2D and a second proximal height H11-2P. Thetop surface 1471 of thethird element 1470 forms a second angle 1471A2 with respect to a longitudinal axis parallel to thebottom surface 1420 of thebase element 1410. - Turning also to
FIGS. 53A and 53B , in which perspective views of the exemplaryintervertebral device 1400 are depicted in cut view along section A-A ofFIG. 51A , as with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, and discussed above, theelements intervertebral device 1400 has a geometric height, Hi′, may have a minimum height, H11-1, in a collapsed configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 53A , and a maximum height, H11_2, in an expanded configuration, as generally depicted inFIG. 53B . As discussed immediately above, theintervertebral device 1400 in a collapsed configuration has a first distal height H11-1D and a first proximal height H11-1P, and in an expanded configuration has a second distal height H11-2D and a second proximal height H11-2P. - The
first element 1410, also referred to as base 1410 orbase element 1410, may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for theintervertebral device 1400, and includes afirst end 1412, asecond end 1414, and two side portions, afirst side portion 1416 and an opposing side portion 1118 (as shown inFIGS. 51A-51C ). Abottom portion 1420 includes one or more openings 1422, allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example. The second andthird elements proximal end 1412 may include an opening 1430 at theproximal end 1412 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking theintervertebral device 1400 in a specific configuration, for example. Such an opening 1430 may be similar, for example, to opening 1330 of theintervertebral device 1300, as depicted inFIG. 46A . As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, utilizing a single connecting point on thedevice 1400 for interfacing with a tool that can allow for other tools to be easily attached, tools for expanding, contracting or locking thedevice 1400 in a specific configuration, or tools for delivery of therapeutic materials, provides for a more efficient system, allowing a user to more easily place, position, manipulate, and operate thedevice 1400. - The
intervertebral device 1400 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H11, between a first collapsed heights H11-1D, H11-1P, as depicted inFIG. 53A , and second expanded heights H11-2D and H11-2P, as depicted inFIG. 53B . As described in greater detail below, since thethird element 1470 is configured to rotate with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1300 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration, a distal portion of thethird element 1470 may have a first expanded height H11-2D and a proximal portion of thethird element 1470 may have a second height H8-2P. For example, theintervertebral device 1400 may be expanded from a first position, having minimum distal height of H11-1D and a minimum proximal height H11-1P as depicted inFIG. 53A , to a second position, having a maximum distal height of H11-2D and a maximum proximal height of H11-2P as depicted inFIG. 28 , or another position therebetween, and locked in that corresponding position. - The
proximal end 1412 may also include structures, such asprotrusions 1430P andgrooves 1430G, which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect todelivery device 800 ofFIG. 6 , for example, in a similar manner asintervertebral device 1100, for example. In this way, such therapeutic agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue, encouraging healing. The tubular members to perform these functions may be the same tubular member or different tubular members. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the
third element 1470 may be slidably interfaced to the first andsecond elements third element 1470 at least slides vertically with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1470 may include one or more openings 1472 in the top portion orsurface 1471 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough. Thetop portion 1471 may include one ormore protrusions 1474 that may aide in holding thetop portion 1471 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only afew protrusions 1474 are identified, additional orless protrusions 1474 may be utilized.Such protrusion structures 1474 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form. Additionally, sidewalls 1416, 1418 ofelement 1410 may include one or more protrusions (not shown), and a bottom portion orsurface 1420 ofbase 1410 may include one or more protrusions 1421. Protrusions 1421 may be, for example, similar toprotrusions 1474, which may aide in holding abottom portion 1420 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example. - The
first element 1410 may include a positioning structure orprotrusion 1424, which may be configured or adapted to move within a correspondingchannel 1476 of thethird element 1470 to ensure thethird element 1470 moves in a specific direction with respect to thebase element 1410. In this case, theprotrusion 1424 andcorresponding channel 1476 may be curvilinear to allow for rotation of thethird element 1470 with respect to thesecond element 1440 as thesecond element 1440 translates. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, a void or
space 1402 is defined by the first, second, andthird elements intervertebral device 1400, thevoid 1402 increasing as thedevice 1400 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. In this way, once thedevice 1400 is deployed, one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within thevoid 1402. As described above, such therapeutic agents may further flow out of thevoid 1402 via additional openings, such as openings 1472 and 1422, positioned about theelements - In operation, the
third element 1470 ofintervertebral device 1400 at least rotates with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1400 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second andthird elements intervertebral device 1400 may be curvilinear to encourage at least rotational movement of thethird element 1470 with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1470 to move at different rates with respect to other portions thereof, while maintaining constant or near constant surface contact between the curvilinear surfaces of thethird element 1470 and thesecond element 1440. More specifically, thethird element 1470 may include a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1478 that are configured or adapted to come in contact along a respective one of a plurality ofcurvilinear surfaces 1448 ofsecond element 1440. Curvilinear surfaces 1478 may include a first pair ofcurvilinear surfaces 1478A and a second par ofcurvilinear surfaces 1478B and these curvilinear surfaces may interface with correspondingcurvilinear surfaces second element 1440, respectively. Accordingly, as the second element or slidingelement 1440 translates between thefirst end 1412 and thesecond end 1414 of thebase element 1410, thecurvilinear surfaces 1448 of thesecond element 1440 contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1478 of thethird element 1470 resulting in movement of theelement 1470 in at least a vertical direction. - As depicted, translation of sliding
element 1440 from thefirst end 1412 toward thesecond end 1414 results in movement of theelement 1470 in at least a vertical direction away from thebase element 1410, thethird element 1470 rotating with respect to the first andsecond elements element 1440 in a direction from thesecond end 1414 toward thefirst end 1412 results in movement of theelement 1470 in at least a vertical direction toward thebase element 1410, thethird element 1470 once again rotating with respect to the first andsecond elements top surface 1471 of thethird element 1470 being substantially parallel with thebottom surface 1420 of thefirst element 1410 when thedevice 1400 returns to its collapsed configuration. - Curvilinear surfaces 1448A of the
second element 1440 andcurvilinear surfaces 1478A of thethird element 1470 may define a first circle having a radius R1 (not shown), whilecurvilinear surface 1448B of the second element andcurvilinear surface 1478B of thethird element 1470 may define a second circle having a radius R2 (not shown), which is greater than the radius R1. First and second circles are concentric allowing for all interfacing curvilinear surfaces to be in intimate contact during activation. As thesecond element 1440 moves distally, differences in radii R1 and R2 result in portions of thethird element 1470 moving vertically at differing rates. For example,corner portions third element 1170 may move vertically at a slower rate thancorner portions third element 1470, resulting in at least rotational movement of thethird element 1470 with respect to the first andsecond elements - As shown in
FIG. 53A , when thesecond element 1440 is in its most proximal position, a minimum height of thethird element 1470 is H11-1D and a maximum height of thethird element 1470 is H11-1P, thetop surface 1471 of thethird element 1470 forming an angle 1471A1 with respect to abottom surface 1420 of thebase element 1410. As shown inFIG. 53B , when thesecond element 1440 is in its most distal position, a minimum height of thethird element 1470 is H11-2D and a maximum height of thethird element 1470 is H11-2P, thetop surface 1471 of thethird element 1470 forming an angle 1471A2 with respect to a bottom surface of thebase element 1410. The height H11-2D and the height H11-2P may range any suitable amount to provide for a desired angle 1471A2. As should be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art, the radii R1 and R2 may be selected to provide for larger or smaller rates of rotation of thethird element 1470 with respect to thefirst element 1410. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the first element or
base element 1410 may include a plurality of engaging elements 1456 that protrude from a top inner surface of thebottom portion 1420 ofelement 1410.Second element 1440 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1450, at least one of theelements 1450 engaging a respective one of the plurality of engaging elements 1456. While depicted as being integral to therespective elements engaging elements base element 1410 and slidingelement 1440, respectively. As with theengaging elements intervertebral device 700, theengaging elements element - As with
intervertebral device 700, theintervertebral device 1400 may be configured such that applying a linear force to the slidingelement 1440 to translate theelement 1440 between the first andsecond ends base member 1410, results in eachengaging element 1450 sliding up and over a correspondingengaging element 1436, and engaging an adjacentengaging element 1436 in the direction of the movement of slidingelement 1440. Accordingly, slidingelement 1440, while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of thebase element 1410, may also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of theengaging elements 1450, 1456 of the slidingelement 1440 andbase element 1410, respectively. - The
intervertebral device 1400 may further include a plurality ofpins 1445 coupled to slidingmember 1440 and extending throughcorresponding openings 1428 in theside portions base element 1410, theopenings 1428 may be similar toopenings 728 of theintervertebral device 700, as viewed inFIGS. 51A-53B . It is noted that by adjusting the slope or curvilinear shape of each side surface of theengaging elements 1450, 1456 the translational force to move the slidingelement 1440 in the presence of a compression force between thetop surface 1471 ofelement 1470 and thebottom portion 1420 of thebase element 1410 may differ in accordance with thecorresponding element 1450, 1456 shaped surfaces. The geometric shape of each side surface of theengaging elements 1450, 1456, which may be linear or curvilinear, or a combination thereof, may be configured to encourage movement of the slidingelement 1440 in a first direction along the longitudinal axis of the base 1410 with respect to movement of the slidingelement 1440 in a second opposite direction. In any case, theengaging elements third element 1470 and thebase element 1410. - The sliding
element 1440 may include a protrusion 1444, similar toprotrusion 1144 of the slidingelement 1140 ofintervertebral device 1100, such protrusion being configured or adapted to slidably interface with a corresponding recessed portion or groove along the inner walls of side portions, respectively, of thethird element 1470. - As with
vertebral device 700, in the presence of a linear force applied to slidingelement 1440 moving theelement 1440 toward thedistal end 1414, in a ratcheting manner, for example, theengaging elements 1450, 1456 continuously engage and disengage with adjacent opposingengaging elements 1450, 1456. As theelement 1440 translates, thethird element 1470 moves vertically to increase the overall height, H11, of thedevice 1400. With a compression force applied between thethird element 1470 and thebase element 1410, e.g. when thedevice 1400 is positioned between adjacent tissue surfaces, such as two adjacent vertebrae, theengaging elements 1450, 1456 of the slidingelement 1440 andbase element 1410, respectively, engage and prevent the slidingelement 1440 from further translating. For illustration purposes only, the slidingelement 1440 of theintervertebral device 1400 may be translated through the use of a tool, such asexemplary tool 1000 described above for example, the distal portion of the slidingelement 1440 including protrusions and grooves similar toprotrusions 1140P andgrooves 1140G, as best viewed inFIGS. 29 and 30 , to interface with thetool 1000, for example. - This disclosure provides exemplary embodiments that allow for the generation of a multitude of different intervertebral devices through determining the desired initial and final heights, and an angle of a top surface of the intervertebral device with respect to a bottom surface of said device. In this way, an intervertebral device may be provided that corresponds to any suitable access approach and patient anatomy. For example, certain embodiments may have third elements that rotate about an axis that is substantially perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device, such as exemplary
intervertebral device 1100 and exemplaryintervertebral device 1400. Additionally, certain embodiments may have third elements that rotate about an axis that is substantially parallel to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device, such as exemplaryintervertebral device 1300. However, it should be noted that the rotational axis about which the third element rotates might not be parallel to nor perpendicular to a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device. For illustration purposes only, such a rotational axis may form a 45-degree angle with a longitudinal axis of the intervertebral device. Such a device is discussed immediately below with respect toFIGS. 54A-56B . - Turning now to
FIG. 54A , yet another exemplaryintervertebral device 1500 includes a first orbase element 1510, a second or slidingelement 1540, and a third or liftingelement 1570. Theintervertebral device 1500 is generally similar to other intervertebral devices described or disclosed herein, however the first, second andthird elements third element 1570 is adapted to rotate with respect to theother elements intervertebral device 1500. - As with other embodiments described herein, the
third element 1570 may include atop surface 1571 that may include first, second, third, and forth corner portions, 1571 C1, 1571 C2, 1571 C3, 1571 C4, respectively, and 1571 C collectively. Thesecond element 1540 and thethird element 1570 may be adapted such that each of the four corner portions 1570 c of thetop surface 1571 move at one of a plurality of rates as thesecond element 1540 translates with respect to thethird element 1570. More specifically, each of thefirst corner portion 1571 C1, thesecond corner portion 1571 C2, thethird corner portion 1571 C3, and theforth corner portion 1571 C4 may have a respective one of a plurality of rates. In this way, for example, thethird element 1570 may have a topplanar surface 1571 that is angled with respect to a bottomplanar surface 1520 of thebase element 1510 as theinterventional device 1500 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. Furthermore, as described in greater detail above with respect tointervertebral device 1100A, thetop surface 1571 of thethird element 1570 may be initially angled with respect to abottom surface 1520 of thebase element 1510 when in a collapsed configuration, such that when thethird element 1570 is elevated at least a portion, its topplanar surface 1571 may form a desired angle with respect to the bottomplanar surface 1520 of thebase element 1510. - The
intervertebral device 1500 includes aproximal end 1512 and adistal end 1514, and theproximal end 1512 may includegeometric structures intervertebral device 1500, as described in greater detail above with respect to other embodiments. The first, second, andthird elements - Turning also to
FIGS. 54B and 54C , which depict elevation side views of theintervertebral device 1500 as viewed from section line A, the section line A being perpendicular to the axis of rotation RC3, in both a collapsed configuration (FIG. 54B ) and an expanded configuration (FIG. 54C ). Thebase element 1510 and the slidingelement 1540 include various protrusions and grooves to allow for interfacing thedevice 1500 to a delivery system, such asdelivery system 800. For example, theelongated shaft 900 of thedelivery system 800 may engage agroove 1530G and aprotrusion 1530P of thesecond element 1540, in accordance with the discussion above with respect to groove 730G andprotrusion 730P of theintervertebral device 700. Thedelivery system 800 may further include portions that interface with one ormore recesses 1532 to fixedly hold theintervertebral device 1500 in contact with thedelivery system 800. Accordingly, when theelongate shaft 900 is translated towarddistal end 1514 of theintervertebral device 1500, in a direction parallel to longitudinal axis L of thedevice 1500 for example, the sliding orsecond element 1540 also translates in a distal direction. As the slidingelement 1540 moves distally various curvilinear surfaces of the slidingelement 1540 cooperate with corresponding various curvilinear surfaces of thelifting element 1570 such that thetop surface 1571 moves in a rotationally vertical direction away from thebase element 1510, for example, as described in greater detail below. - Turning now to
FIG. 55A , since theintervertebral device 1500 includes a slopedtop surface 1571 as compared to abottom surface 1520 of thebase 1510, in a collapsed position theintervertebral device 1500 may have a first distal height, for example nearcorner 1571 C2, H12-1D and a first proximal height, for example nearcorner 1571 C3, H12-1P. Note that these heights are for illustration purposes only and are defined relative to the specific elevation views ofFIGS. 54B and 54C and, therefore, are not necessarily the distal most or proximal most portions of thedevice 1500. Thetop surface 1571 may define an angle 1571A1 with respect to a line, RP, which is perpendicular to the axis of rotation, RC3, and parallel to thebottom surface 1520 of thebase 1510. In the collapsed configuration the slidingelement 1540 is in its most proximal position. - Turning now to
FIG. 54C , the slidingelement 1540 has moved from its most proximal position to its most distal position, thethird element 1570 rotating with respect to thebase element 1510 such that thetop surface 1571 has a second distal height H12-2D and a second proximal height H12-2P. Thetop surface 1571 of thethird element 1570 forms a second angle 1571A2 with respect to a line, RP, which is perpendicular to the axis of rotation, RC3, and parallel to thebottom surface 1520 of thebase 1510. - Turning also to
FIGS. 55A and 55B , in which perspective views of the exemplaryintervertebral device 1500 are depicted in cut view along section B-B ofFIG. 54A , as with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, and discussed above, theelements intervertebral device 1500 has a geometric height, H12. The height, H12, of theintervertebral device 1500 and may have a minimum value in a collapsed configuration as depicted inFIG. 55A , generally referred to as a height H12-1, and may have a maximum value in an expanded configuration as depicted inFIG. 55B , generally referred to as height H12-2. More specifically, theintervertebral device 1500 in a collapsed configuration has a first distal height H12-1D and a first proximal height H12-1P, and in an expanded configuration has a second distal height H12-2D and a second proximal height H12-2P. - The
first element 1510, also referred to as base 1510 orbase element 1510, may be configured to provide a base or outer structure for theintervertebral device 1500, and includes afirst end 1512, and asecond end 1514. Abottom portion 1520 includes one or more openings 1522 (not shown), allowing for one or more therapeutic agents to pass therethrough, for example. The second andthird elements proximal end 1512 may include an opening 1530 for passing a portion of one or more tools utilized for delivery of said therapeutic materials, or expanding, contracting, or locking theintervertebral device 1500 in a specific configuration, for example. Such an opening 1530 may be similar, for example, to opening 1330 of theintervertebral device 1300, as depicted inFIG. 46A . As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, utilizing a single connecting point on thedevice 1500 for interfacing with a tool that can allow for other tools to be easily attached, tools for expanding, contracting or locking thedevice 1500 in a specific configuration, or tools for delivery of therapeutic materials, provides for a more efficient system, allowing a user to more easily place, position, manipulate, and operate thedevice 1500. - The
intervertebral device 1500 may be expanded or contracted to any suitable height, H12, between a first collapsed heights H12-1D, H12-1P, as depicted inFIG. 55A , and second expanded heights H12-2D and H12-2P, as depicted inFIG. 55B . As described in greater detail below, since thethird element 1570 is configured to rotate, as well as move vertically, with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1500 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration, a distal portion of thethird element 1570 may have a first expanded height H12-2D and a proximal portion of thethird element 1570 may have a second height H12-2P. For example, theintervertebral device 1500 may be expanded from a first position, having minimum distal height of H12-1D and a minimum proximal height H12-1P as depicted inFIG. 55A , to a second position, having a maximum distal height of H12-2D and a maximum proximal height of H12-2P as depicted inFIG. 55B , or another position therebetween, and locked in that corresponding position. For illustration purposes, the height H12, may range from about 12 mm to about 25 mm, and the angle may range from between about 0 degrees to about 20 degrees. - The
proximal end 1512 may also include structures, such asprotrusions 1530P andgrooves 1530G, best views inFIG. 54A , which may allow for attachment points to a delivery system (not shown), as described above with respect todelivery device 800 ofFIG. 6 , for example, in a similar manner asintervertebral device 1100, for example. In this way, such therapeutic agents or materials may contact surrounding tissues, such as bone tissue, encouraging healing. The tubular members to perform these functions may be the same tubular member or different tubular members. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the
third element 1570 may be slidably interfaced to the first andsecond elements third element 1570 at least slides vertically with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1570 may include one or more openings 1572 in the top portion orsurface 1571 thereof to allow for passage or introduction of therapeutic elements or bone growth enhancing materials therethrough. Thetop portion 1571 may include one ormore protrusions 1574 that may aide in holding thetop portion 1571 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebrae structures for example. While only afew protrusions 1574 are identified, additional orless protrusions 1574 may be utilized.Such protrusion structures 1574 may be constructed from any biocompatible material and in any suitable form. Additionally, a bottom portion orsurface 1520 ofbase 1510 may include one ormore protrusions 1521.Protrusions 1521 may be, for example, similar toprotrusions 1574, which may aide in holding abottom portion 1520 immobile with respect to adjacent structures or biological tissue, such as vertebral structures for example. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, a void or
space 1502 is defined by the first, second, andthird elements intervertebral device 1500, thevoid 1502 increasing as thedevice 1500 transitions from a collapsed configuration to an expanded configuration. In this way, once thedevice 1500 is deployed, one or more therapeutic agents may be positioned within thevoid 1502. As described above, such therapeutic agents may further flow out of thevoid 1502 via additional openings, such as openings 1572 and 1522, positioned about theelements - In operation, the
third element 1570 ofintervertebral device 1500 at least rotates with respect to the first andsecond elements intervertebral device 1500 utilizes interfacing, interacting or mating surfaces between the second andthird elements intervertebral device 1500 may be curvilinear to encourage at least rotational movement of thethird element 1570 with respect to the first andsecond elements third element 1570 to move at different rates with respect to other portions thereof, while maintaining constant or near constant surface contact between the curvilinear surfaces of thethird element 1570 and thesecond element 1540. More specifically, thethird element 1570 may include a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1578 that are configured or adapted to come in contact along a respective one of a plurality of curvilinear surfaces 1548 ofsecond element 1540. Curvilinear surfaces 1578 may include a first curvilinear surface 1578A (not shown) and a secondcurvilinear surface 1578B along a distal portion of thethird element 1570, and a third curvilinear surface 1578C (not shown) and a forthcurvilinear surface 1578D along a proximal portion of thethird element 1570. These curvilinear surfaces 1578 may interface with corresponding curvilinear surfaces 1548A (not shown), 1548B, 1548C (not shown), and 1548D of thesecond element 1540, respectively. Accordingly, as the second element or slidingelement 1540 translates between thefirst end 1512 and thesecond end 1514 of thebase element 1510, the curvilinear surfaces 1548 of thesecond element 1540 contact and slide along corresponding respective curvilinear surfaces 1578 of thethird element 1570 resulting in movement of thethird element 1570 in a rotationally vertical direction with respect to thebase element 1510 and the slidingelement 1540. - As depicted, translation of sliding
element 1540 from thefirst end 1512 toward thesecond end 1514 results in movement of theelement 1570 in at least a vertical direction away from thebase element 1510, thethird element 1570 rotating with respect to the first andsecond elements element 1540 in a direction from thesecond end 1514 toward thefirst end 1512 results in movement of theelement 1570 in at least a vertical direction toward thebase element 1510, thethird element 1570 once again rotating with respect to the first andsecond elements top surface 1571 of thethird element 1570 being substantially parallel with thebottom surface 1520 of thefirst element 1510 when thedevice 1500 returns to its collapsed configuration. - Turning to
FIGS. 56 through 60 , the characteristics of curvilinear surfaces 1578. 1548 of theintervertebral device 1500 will be discussed in greater detail. In particular, each of theFIGS. 56A, 57A, 58A, and 59A depict aportion 1540A of thesecond element 1540 and aportion 1570A of thethird element 1570 in a first position, whileFIGS. 56B, 57B, 58B, and 59B depict theportion 1570A of thethird element 1570 in a second position relative to theportion 1540A of thesecond element 1540, which maintains its first position for this discussion. The various figures depict the curvilinear surfaces 1578, 1548 of theportions intervertebral device 1500. More specifically,FIGS. 56A and 56B depict a top view of a portion of theintervertebral device 1500 along its longitudinal axis, L;FIGS. 57A and 57B depict a front view of the portion of theintervertebral device 1500 along its longitudinal axis, L;FIGS. 58A and 58B depict a left side view of the portion of theintervertebral device 1500 along its longitudinal axis, L; andFIGS. 59A and 59B depict an isometric view of the portion of theintervertebral device 1500. - As depicted, the curvilinear surfaces 1578, 1548 are perfectly coplanar with a cylindrical structure, C1, having an axis,
Axis 1, which is also the rotational axis about which thethird element 1570 rotates. In this example,Axis 1 is approximately 45 degrees from the longitudinal axis, L, of theintervertebral device 1500. Accordingly, as the portion of thethird element 1570 moves relative to thesecond element 1540, the third element merely rotates aboutAxis 1 while moving generally parallel to the longitudinal axis, L, of theintervertebral device 1500, as shown inFIGS. 56B, 57B, 58B, and 59B . Alternatively, one can describe this movement as, first, rotating aboutAxis 1 and then, second, moving parallel toAxis 1. This also perfectly mimics the outcome of the two parts if the bottom part moves along its longitudinal axis and the top part is held in place but free to rotate and translate upward. - Turning to
FIG. 60 , initial location of the twoportions portion 1540A is moved and thetop portion 1570A is allowed to only rotate and translate upward, the final view ofportion 1570A being 1570AF and the final view ofportion 1540A being 1540 F. A top surface of theportion 1570A includes a planar surface P1, and the top surface of theportion 1570AF includes a planar surface P2. The circle, C2, defines the intersection of the two planes P1 and P2, an angle, AF, between the two planes P1 and P2 defining the angle between the top surface of the third element 1570F in its final position and the top surface of thethird element 1570A. Because the two portions, 1570A, 1540A, move in continuous motion all positions in between the initial and final positions will be continuous. - The angle between
Axis 1 and the longitudinal axis, L, of theintervertebral device 1500 and the location ofAxis 1 relative to theintervertebral device 1500 can all be varied to bring about a desired angle of rotation and location of rotation, e.g., C2 ofFIG. 60 , of the top part. - The common surface between
portions Axis 1. In this way theportion 1570A, relative to theportion 1540A, can always be rotated aboutAxis 1 and moved in the direction parallel to the longitudinal axis, L. Alternatively, one can describe this movement as, first, rotating aboutAxis 1 and then, second, moving parallel toAxis 1, thus keeping all the common surfaces between the two parts in constant contact. This completely mimics the slidingelement 1540 andthird element 1570 onintervertebral device 1500. - As with other intervertebral devices described or contemplated herein, the first element or
base element 1510 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1536 that protrude from a top inner surface of thebottom portion 1520 ofelement 1510.Second element 1540 may include a plurality ofengaging elements 1550, at least one of theelements 1550 engaging a respective one of the plurality ofengaging elements 1536. While depicted as being integral to therespective elements engaging elements base element 1510 and slidingelement 1540, respectively. As with theengaging elements intervertebral device 700, theengaging elements element - As with
intervertebral device 700, theintervertebral device 1500 may be configured such that applying a linear force to the slidingelement 1540 to translate theelement 1540 between the first andsecond ends base member 1510, results in eachengaging element 1550 sliding up and over a correspondingengaging element 1536, and engaging an adjacentengaging element 1536 in the direction of the movement of slidingelement 1540. Accordingly, slidingelement 1540, while primarily moving along the longitudinal axis of thebase element 1510, may also move vertically in accordance with the geometry outline and coupling of theengaging elements element 1540 andbase element 1510, respectively. - The
intervertebral device 1500 may further include a plurality of pins 1545 coupled to slidingmember 1540 and extending throughcorresponding openings 1528 in the side portions 1516, 1518 ofbase element 1510, theopenings 1528 may be similar toopenings 728 of theintervertebral device 700. - The intervertebral devices described herein may be made from any suitable biocompatible material, including but not limited to metals, metal alloys (e.g. stainless steel) and polymers (e.g. polycarbonate), and may be formed using any appropriate process, such as screw-machining or molding (e.g. injection molding). The intervertebral devices herein may be sized for minimally invasive procedures having operating lumens at about 14 mm or less.
- It should be understood that features of any one of the above-described intervertebral devices described herein may be applied to any other of the above-described intervertebral devices, as appropriate. The intervertebral devices described herein may be made from any suitable biocompatible material, including but not limited to metals, metal alloys (e.g. stainless steel) and polymers (e.g., polycarbonate), and may be formed using any appropriate process, such as screw-machining or molding (e.g., injection molding). The intervertebral devices herein may be sized for minimally invasive procedures having operating lumens at about 12 mm or less.
Claims (20)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/833,792 US20220313451A1 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2022-06-06 | Intervertbral devices and related methods |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201562194149P | 2015-07-17 | 2015-07-17 | |
US15/213,394 US11369483B2 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2016-07-18 | Intervertebral devices and related methods |
US17/833,792 US20220313451A1 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2022-06-06 | Intervertbral devices and related methods |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/213,394 Continuation US11369483B2 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2016-07-18 | Intervertebral devices and related methods |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20220313451A1 true US20220313451A1 (en) | 2022-10-06 |
Family
ID=57834595
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/213,394 Active US11369483B2 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2016-07-18 | Intervertebral devices and related methods |
US17/833,792 Pending US20220313451A1 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2022-06-06 | Intervertbral devices and related methods |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/213,394 Active US11369483B2 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2016-07-18 | Intervertebral devices and related methods |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US11369483B2 (en) |
EP (2) | EP4032507A1 (en) |
CN (2) | CN108289742B (en) |
ES (1) | ES2915269T3 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2017015244A2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (22)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8597360B2 (en) | 2004-11-03 | 2013-12-03 | Neuropro Technologies, Inc. | Bone fusion device |
US10758367B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2020-09-01 | Globus Medical Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US10709573B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2020-07-14 | Globus Medical Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US10835387B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2020-11-17 | Globus Medical Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US10779957B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2020-09-22 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US10842644B2 (en) * | 2010-09-03 | 2020-11-24 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US11793654B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2023-10-24 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US10869768B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2020-12-22 | Globus Medical Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US11446162B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2022-09-20 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
WO2013023098A1 (en) | 2011-08-09 | 2013-02-14 | Neuropro Spinal Jaxx Inc. | Bone fusion device, apparatus and method |
US9532883B2 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2017-01-03 | Neuropro Technologies, Inc. | Bone fusion device |
WO2014151934A1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2014-09-25 | Neuropro Technologies, Inc. | Bodiless bone fusion device, apparatus and method |
US10004608B2 (en) * | 2016-02-26 | 2018-06-26 | K2M, Inc. | Insertion instrument for expandable spinal implants |
AU2017202280B2 (en) * | 2016-04-07 | 2021-04-01 | Howmedica Osteonics Corp. | Surgical insertion instruments |
US10420591B2 (en) | 2016-04-14 | 2019-09-24 | Spinal Simplicity, Llc | Interspinous implant insertion instrument with staggered path implant deployment mechanism |
FR3058043B1 (en) * | 2016-10-27 | 2020-11-13 | Ldr Medical | EXPANDABLE INTERSOMATIC CAGE |
FR3058044A1 (en) * | 2016-10-27 | 2018-05-04 | Ldr Medical | EXPANDABLE INTERSOMATIC CAGE |
US10729560B2 (en) | 2017-01-18 | 2020-08-04 | Neuropro Technologies, Inc. | Bone fusion system, device and method including an insertion instrument |
US10111760B2 (en) * | 2017-01-18 | 2018-10-30 | Neuropro Technologies, Inc. | Bone fusion system, device and method including a measuring mechanism |
EP3456297B1 (en) | 2017-09-15 | 2023-10-04 | Howmedica Osteonics Corp. | Instruments for expandable interbody implants |
EP3485850B1 (en) * | 2017-11-16 | 2023-09-13 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device |
WO2021243644A1 (en) | 2020-06-04 | 2021-12-09 | Chin Sing Fatt | Surgical devices controllable by surgical robotic systems |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20100211176A1 (en) * | 2008-11-12 | 2010-08-19 | Stout Medical Group, L.P. | Fixation device and method |
US20130158663A1 (en) * | 2011-12-19 | 2013-06-20 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc | Expandable interbody implant and methods of use |
Family Cites Families (50)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5860973A (en) | 1995-02-27 | 1999-01-19 | Michelson; Gary Karlin | Translateral spinal implant |
US6986772B2 (en) | 2001-03-01 | 2006-01-17 | Michelson Gary K | Dynamic lordotic guard with movable extensions for creating an implantation space posteriorly in the lumbar spine |
EP1272130B1 (en) | 2001-02-04 | 2004-11-17 | MICHELSON, Gary Karlin | Instrumentation for inserting and deploying an expandable interbody spinal fusion implant |
US6648917B2 (en) | 2001-10-17 | 2003-11-18 | Medicinelodge, Inc. | Adjustable bone fusion implant and method |
US20040087947A1 (en) * | 2002-08-28 | 2004-05-06 | Roy Lim | Minimally invasive expanding spacer and method |
US7828849B2 (en) | 2003-02-03 | 2010-11-09 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Expanding interbody implant and articulating inserter and method |
US7204853B2 (en) | 2003-08-05 | 2007-04-17 | Flexuspine, Inc. | Artificial functional spinal unit assemblies |
US7753958B2 (en) | 2003-08-05 | 2010-07-13 | Gordon Charles R | Expandable intervertebral implant |
US7316714B2 (en) | 2003-08-05 | 2008-01-08 | Flexuspine, Inc. | Artificial functional spinal unit assemblies |
US7909869B2 (en) | 2003-08-05 | 2011-03-22 | Flexuspine, Inc. | Artificial spinal unit assemblies |
US8052723B2 (en) | 2003-08-05 | 2011-11-08 | Flexuspine Inc. | Dynamic posterior stabilization systems and methods of use |
US7235082B2 (en) | 2003-08-12 | 2007-06-26 | Depuy Spine, Inc. | Device for insertion of implants |
US7569074B2 (en) * | 2003-12-11 | 2009-08-04 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Expandable intervertebral implant |
US7850733B2 (en) | 2004-02-10 | 2010-12-14 | Atlas Spine, Inc. | PLIF opposing wedge ramp |
US7967867B2 (en) | 2007-05-31 | 2011-06-28 | Spine Wave, Inc. | Expandable interbody fusion device |
US8328818B1 (en) | 2007-08-31 | 2012-12-11 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Devices and methods for treating bone |
US8110004B2 (en) | 2008-08-21 | 2012-02-07 | The Trustees Of The Stevens Institute Of Technology | Expandable interbody fusion cage with rotational insert |
US9408708B2 (en) | 2008-11-12 | 2016-08-09 | Stout Medical Group, L.P. | Fixation device and method |
US9387090B2 (en) * | 2009-03-12 | 2016-07-12 | Nuvasive, Inc. | Vertebral body replacement |
WO2010132841A1 (en) | 2009-05-14 | 2010-11-18 | Stout Medical Group, L.P. | Expandable support device and method of use |
US8556979B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2013-10-15 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8685098B2 (en) | 2010-06-25 | 2014-04-01 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US9155628B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2015-10-13 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US9216095B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2015-12-22 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8062375B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2011-11-22 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8709086B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2014-04-29 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8679183B2 (en) | 2010-06-25 | 2014-03-25 | Globus Medical | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
CN102892387B (en) | 2010-03-16 | 2016-03-16 | 品尼高脊柱集团有限责任公司 | Intervertebral implant and graft induction system and method |
US8535380B2 (en) | 2010-05-13 | 2013-09-17 | Stout Medical Group, L.P. | Fixation device and method |
US9351848B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2016-05-31 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8398713B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2013-03-19 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8435298B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2013-05-07 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US9566168B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2017-02-14 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8632595B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2014-01-21 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
US8491659B2 (en) | 2010-09-03 | 2013-07-23 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Expandable fusion device and method of installation thereof |
EP2608749B1 (en) * | 2011-03-11 | 2016-08-10 | FBC Device Aps | Spinal implant |
CN202191381U (en) * | 2011-07-12 | 2012-04-18 | 丁亮华 | Adjustable intervertebral fusion device |
US9381048B2 (en) * | 2011-08-31 | 2016-07-05 | DePuy Synthes Products, Inc. | Devices and methods for cervical lateral fixation |
WO2013036707A1 (en) | 2011-09-09 | 2013-03-14 | Spine Wave, Inc. | Lateral approach expandable spinal implant and method |
US9445919B2 (en) * | 2011-12-19 | 2016-09-20 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Expandable interbody implant and methods of use |
FR2987256B1 (en) * | 2012-02-24 | 2014-08-08 | Ldr Medical | ANCHORING DEVICE FOR INTERVERTEBRAL IMPLANT, INTERVERTEBRAL IMPLANT AND IMPLANTATION INSTRUMENTATION |
US20140094917A1 (en) * | 2012-10-02 | 2014-04-03 | Anthony A. Salerni | Expandable fusion cage with cam adjuster |
US20140207235A1 (en) * | 2013-01-23 | 2014-07-24 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc. | Expandable allograft cage |
US9700430B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2017-07-11 | Pioneer Surgical Technology, Inc. | Systems and methods for inserting an expandable intervertebral device |
CN105491972A (en) * | 2013-05-14 | 2016-04-13 | 脊柱诊察公司 | Intervertebral devices and related methods |
US9839528B2 (en) * | 2014-02-07 | 2017-12-12 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Variable lordosis spacer and related methods of use |
US9717605B2 (en) * | 2014-06-03 | 2017-08-01 | Atlas Spine, Inc. | Spinal implant device |
WO2016019230A1 (en) | 2014-08-01 | 2016-02-04 | Globus Medical, Inc. | Variable lordosis spacer and related methods of use |
JP6092177B2 (en) * | 2014-11-05 | 2017-03-08 | エル・デ・エール・メデイカル | Fixation devices, intervertebral implants, and implantable devices |
CN204683847U (en) * | 2015-04-21 | 2015-10-07 | 李鹏 | Expansible Invasive lumbar fusion device |
-
2016
- 2016-07-18 US US15/213,394 patent/US11369483B2/en active Active
- 2016-07-19 WO PCT/US2016/042869 patent/WO2017015244A2/en unknown
- 2016-07-19 EP EP22154600.5A patent/EP4032507A1/en active Pending
- 2016-07-19 CN CN201680054060.9A patent/CN108289742B/en active Active
- 2016-07-19 EP EP16828391.9A patent/EP3324896B1/en active Active
- 2016-07-19 CN CN202110063284.9A patent/CN112932748B/en active Active
- 2016-07-19 ES ES16828391T patent/ES2915269T3/en active Active
-
2022
- 2022-06-06 US US17/833,792 patent/US20220313451A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20100211176A1 (en) * | 2008-11-12 | 2010-08-19 | Stout Medical Group, L.P. | Fixation device and method |
US20130158663A1 (en) * | 2011-12-19 | 2013-06-20 | Warsaw Orthopedic, Inc | Expandable interbody implant and methods of use |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP3324896A4 (en) | 2019-03-20 |
EP3324896B1 (en) | 2022-03-23 |
CN108289742A (en) | 2018-07-17 |
ES2915269T3 (en) | 2022-06-21 |
WO2017015244A3 (en) | 2017-03-09 |
CN108289742B (en) | 2021-02-05 |
US11369483B2 (en) | 2022-06-28 |
US20180368987A9 (en) | 2018-12-27 |
CN112932748A (en) | 2021-06-11 |
WO2017015244A2 (en) | 2017-01-26 |
CN112932748B (en) | 2024-08-13 |
EP3324896A2 (en) | 2018-05-30 |
US20180014944A1 (en) | 2018-01-18 |
EP4032507A1 (en) | 2022-07-27 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20220313451A1 (en) | Intervertbral devices and related methods | |
US11648130B2 (en) | Intervertebral devices and related methods | |
US11896493B2 (en) | Expandable intervertebral spacer | |
US11331200B2 (en) | Expandable spinal implants | |
US20210113349A1 (en) | Articulating expandable intervertebral implant | |
EP3361997B1 (en) | Articulating expandable intervertebral implant | |
JP2019520156A (en) | Extendable and adjustable angled articulating intervertebral cage | |
MX2007006100A (en) | Minimally invasive spinal disc stabilizer and insertion tool. | |
US20240225851A1 (en) | Curved expandable interbody devices and deployment tools | |
EP3536283B1 (en) | Devices for inserting and expanding spinal implants |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: EXPANDING INNOVATIONS, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SPINE VIEW (ABC) LLC;REEL/FRAME:061218/0388 Effective date: 20180514 Owner name: SPINE VIEW (ABC) LLC, CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SPINE VIEW, INC.;REEL/FRAME:061218/0344 Effective date: 20180313 Owner name: SPINE VIEW, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:DAVIS, JOHN;MIREL, AL;REEL/FRAME:061217/0885 Effective date: 20170228 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: ADVISORY ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |